Handleiding Marantz AV8802A (pagina 356 van 363) (Engels)

769604

356

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/363

Pagina verder

AV Pre Tuner

AV8802A

Owner’s Manual

You can print more than one page of a PDF onto a single sheet of paper.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update 8

Upgrade 9

Accessories 10

Inserting the batteries 11

Operating range of the remote control unit 11

Features 12

High quality sound 12

High performance 15

Easy operation 18

Part names and functions 19

Front panel 19

Display 24

Rear panel 28

Remote control unit 31

Connections

Connecting a power amp 36

Speaker installation 36

Connecting a power amp 46

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 50

Connecting a TV 63

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 64

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 65

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 66

Connecting a playback device 67

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 69

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 70

Connecting a video camcorder or game console 71

Connecting a turntable 72

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector 73

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 74

Connecting an FM/AM antenna 77

Connecting to a home network (LAN) 79

Wired LAN 79

Wireless LAN 80

Connecting an external control device 81

REMOTE CONTROL jacks 81

DC OUT jacks 83

Connecting the power cord 84

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Contents

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback

Basic operation 86

Turning the power on 86

Selecting the input source 86

Adjusting the volume 87

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 87

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 87

Playing an iPod 88

Listening to music on an iPod 89

iPod Browse Mode settings 90

Setting the USB port to use (USB Select) 91

Performing repeat playback 92

Performing random playback 92

Playing a USB memory device 93

Playing files stored on USB memory devices 94

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 96

Pairing with a Bluetooth device 97

Playing a Bluetooth device 98

Pairing with the Pairing Mode 100

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 101

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 102

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune) 104

RDS search 104

PTY search 105

TP search 106

Radio Text 106

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) 107

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto

Preset Memory) 107

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) 108

Listening to preset stations 108

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) 109

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) 110

Cancelling Preset Skip 111

Listening to Internet Radio 112

Listening to Internet Radio 113

Playing the last played Internet Radio station 114

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites 115

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 116

Applying media sharing settings 117

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 118

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site 120

Viewing photographs shared by particular users 121

Viewing all photographs on Flickr 123

AirPlay function 124

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 125

Playing iTunes music with this unit 125

Selecting multiple speakers (devices) 126

Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit

of this unit 126

Spotify Connect function 127

Playing Spotify music with this unit 127

Convenience functions 128

Performing repeat playback 129

Performing random playback 129

Registering to Favorites 130

Playing back content added to the “Save to Favorites” 130

Deleting content added to favorites 131

Searching content with keywords (Text Search) 131

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow) 132

Setting the Slideshow Interval 133

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer) 133

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) 134

Adjusting the tone (Tone) 135

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) 136

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode) 137

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 138

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode 139

Selecting a sound mode 140

Direct playback 141

Pure Direct playback 141

Auto surround playback 142

HDMI control function 156

Setting procedure 156

Sleep timer function 157

Using the sleep timer 158

Smart select function 159

Calling up the settings 160

Changing the settings 161

Web control function 162

Controlling the unit from a web control 162

Panel lock function 164

Disabling all key button operations 164

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME 164

Canceling the Panel lock function 165

Remote lock function 166

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit 166

Enabling the remote sensor function 166

Switches light illumination on/off 167

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) 168

Connecting ZONE 168

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 171

Settings

Menu map 173

Menu operations 176

Inputting characters 177

Using the keyboard screen 178

Audio 179

Subwoofer Level Adjust 179

Bass Sync 179

Surround Parameter 180

M-DAX 186

Audio Delay 187

Volume 187

Audyssey 188

Graphic EQ 192

Video 194

Picture Adjust 194

HDMI Setup 196

Output Settings 201

Analog Video Out 205

On Screen Display 206

TV Format 207

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputs 208

Input Assign 208

Source Rename 210

Hide Sources 210

Source Level 210

Input Select 211

Speakers 212

Audyssey® Setup 212

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) 214

Error messages 220

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings 222

Manual Setup 223

Amp Assign 223

Speaker Config. 235

Distances 240

Levels 241

Crossovers 242

Bass 243

Front Speaker 244

2ch Playback 244

Network 247

Information 247

Connection 247

Wi-Fi Setup 248

Settings 250

IP Control 251

Friendly Name 252

Diagnostics 252

Maintenance Mode 253

General 254

Language 254

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup 254

Zone Rename 256

Smart Select Names 256

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 257

Auto Standby 257

Front Display 258

Information 258

Usage Data 260

Firmware 261

Setup Lock 263

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating external devices with the remote control unit 264

Registering preset codes 265

Operating devices 268

Checking registered preset codes 271

Initializing registered preset codes 271

Operating learning function 272

Remembering remote control codes from other devices 273

Delete saved remote control codes 274

Setting the back light 275

Disabling the backlight 275

Turning the backlight on 275

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit 276

Tips

Tips 278

Troubleshooting 280

Resetting factory settings 299

Appendix

About HDMI 300

Video conversion function 303

Playing back a USB memory devices 305

Playing back a Bluetooth device 306

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 307

Playing back Internet Radio 308

Personal memory plus function 308

Last function memory 308

Sound modes and channel output 309

Sound modes and surround parameters 312

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 317

Explanation of terms 321

Trademark information 334

Specifications 337

Index 342

List of preset codes 345

License 356

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update

Update (DTS:X)

DTS:X provides an immersive audio experience in a home theater by optimizing playback using object-based audio, regardless of the speaker

configuration. You can also enjoy an immersive audio experience for older content by using the DTS Neural:X upmixing feature.

DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

DTS:X

Features

High quality sound 13

Connecting speakers

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 51

Selecting a sound mode

Description of sound mode types DTS sound mode 145

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 154

Audio

Dialog Control 182

DTS Neural:X 182

General

Firmware 259

Appendix

Sound modes and channel output 310

Sound mode and surround parameters 314

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 319

Explanation of terms 326

Trademark information 335

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

The text marked with this symbol that will enable after the upgrade of the Auro-3D.

You can experience the best performance of Auro-3D if you install Front Height and Surround Height in addition to standard 5.1-channel. The “Setup

Assistant” will lead you to this setting.

You can use Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup instead of Surround Height speakers for Auro-3D playback.

The AVP also can play Auro-3D using standard 5.1-channel and Front Height speakers. If you install any height speakers instead of Surround Height

speakers and Rear Height speakers, you can set the speaker configuration in setup menu.

Auro-3D (Europe only)

Features

High quality sound 14

Connecting speakers

Speaker installation 38, 41

Layout including height speakers and top speakers 45

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 51

Auro-3D 9.1/10.1-channel system 62

Selecting a sound mode

Description of sound mode types Auro-3D sound mode 146

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 154

Audio

Auro-Matic 3D Preset 183

Auro-Matic 3D Strength 183

Inputs

Decode Mode 211

Manual Setup

Amp Assign 224, 224, 226, 234

Speaker Config. 239

Appendix

Sound modes and channel output 311

Sound mode and surround parameters 312

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 319

Explanation of terms 322

Trademark information 336

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product.

To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.

After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

. .

Quick Start Guide CD-ROM

(Owner’s Manual)

Safety Instructions Notes on radio Cable labels

. . . .

Power cord FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna Sound calibration

microphone

(ACM1HB)

Sound calibration

microphone stand

Remote control unit

(RC027SR)

R03/AAA batteries External antennas for

Bluetooth/wireless

connectivity

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inserting the batteries

1Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and

remove it.

2Insert two batteries correctly into the battery

compartment as indicated.

R03/AAA batteries

3Put the rear cover back on.

NOTE

0To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:

0Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

0Do not use two different types of batteries.

0Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long

periods.

0If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery

compartment and insert new batteries.

Operating range of the remote control

unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

30° 30°

Approx. 7 m

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Features

High quality sound

0Dolby Atmos (v p. 323)

This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos, a

completely new audio format. The placement or movement of sound is

accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling

you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound

field.

0Current feedback amplifier

This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit for its

preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other

equipment that support high-definition audio formats can be amplified

with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback amplifier also

reproduces a natural sound space.

0Audyssey DSX® (v p. 191)

This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX® processor. By connecting

front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey DSX®

processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front

soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can

experience a wider and more expanded front soundstage.

0Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 190)

Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds

disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey

LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low

frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies

psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for

listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs

the neighbors.

0Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (v p. 213)

The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level

and delay for each subwoofer individually.

Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first

compensating for any level and delay differences between the two

subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both

subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.

0DTS Neo:X (v p. 326)

This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or

7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 11.1-channel

speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

0DTS:X

This unit supports DTS:X via firmware update. DTS:X brings the home

theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based

audio technology which removes the bounds of channels.

The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small

and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before

leading to a richer immersive audio experience.

DTS Neo:X is unavailable after updating to DTS:X

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

0Auro-3D

This unit is equipped with an Auro-3D decoder.

With Auro-3D, Front Height (FHL+FHR), Surround Height (SHL+SHR) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel

system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.

After performing the Auro-3D upgrade you will be able to fully enjoy Auro-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for Auro-3D.

2Auro-3D Playback

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

FL FR

SL SR

2Dolby Atmos Playback

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

FL FR

SL SR

Auro-3D does not support a Dolby Atmos configuration using Top Front, Top Middle, Top Rear, Rear Height, or any Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

If you are using these speakers and want to take advantage of the Auro-3D Upgrade, you need to relocate them to Front Height and Surround Height speaker locations as

shown above.

But it is possible to support both an Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos by adding front height and rear height speakersz to a 5.1 configuration.

zFor an optimum Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are strongly recommended.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

High performance

04K 60Hz input/output supported

4K 60p

4:4:4

4K 60p

4:4:4

When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60

frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected

to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy

the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even

when viewing fast-moving video.

This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit

videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets

you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.

0Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD

resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v p. 203)

4K 4K

Up to 1080p

4K Up

scaling

This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows

analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at

4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to

be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high

definition images for any video source.

0HDCP 2.2

This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.2, copyright protection standard.

0Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 168)

The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you

enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing

in the main room.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV

devices (8 inputs, 3 output)

/OutIn

For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8

HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and

conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-

equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a

third HDMI output for another room.

0The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to

network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 124)

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet

Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying

photographs stored on your PC on our television.

This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music

library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.

0Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks

This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as

DSD (2.8 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality

playback of high resolution files.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out

easily (v p. 96)

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your

smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

0Compatible with the “Marantz Remote App”z for performing basic

operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices

(Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)

“Marantz Remote App” is application software that allows you to

perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or

Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume,

and switching the source.

zDownload the appropriate “Marantz Remote App” for your iOS or Android

devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless

LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.

0Multi-Room audio (v p. 138)

【MAIN ZONE】【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE,

ZONE2 and ZONE3.

In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being

played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same

time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout

the whole house.

0Energy-saving design

This unit is equipped with an auto-standby function that automatically

turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce

unnecessary power use.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Easy operation

0“Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions

First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the

instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,

etc.

0Easy to use Graphical User Interface

This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved

operability.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Part names and functions

Front panel

ewq ytr

AB C D E F

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

ewqytr

APower operation button (X)

Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is

located) on/off (standby). (v p. 86)

BPower indicator

This is lit as follows according to the power status:

0Off: Power on

0Red: Normal standby

0Orange:

0When “HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On” (v p. 198)

0When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v p. 199)

0When “IP Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 251)

CINPUT SELECTOR knob

These selects the input source. (v p. 86)

DMain display

This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 24)

ERemote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 11)

FVOLUME knob

These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 87)

GDoor

When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press

the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers

when closing the door.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

With the door open

y u ow

qer ti

ADYNAMIC EQ button

This switches the Dynamic EQ settings. (v p. 189)

BPURE DIRECT button/indicator

This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto.

(v p. 141 – 142)

This lights when the Pure Direct mode is selected as the sound mode.

CM-DAX button/indicator

This enables the M-DAX mode. (v p. 186)

This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected.

DDynamic Volume button (DYNAMIC VOL)

This switches the Dynamic Volume settings. (v p. 190)

ESub display

This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 26)

FBACK button

This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 176)

GCursor buttons (uio p)

These select items. (v p. 176)

HENTER button

This determines the selection. (v p. 176)

ISETUP button

This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 176)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q6 Q7Q5

JMOVIE button

This switches the sound mode to “Movie”. (v p. 140)

KMUSIC button

This switches the sound mode to “Music”. (v p. 140)

LGAME button

This switches the sound mode to “Game”. (v p. 140)

MAudyssey DSX® button (A-DSX)

This switches the Audyssey DSX® settings. (v p. 191)

NSLEEP button

This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 157)

OHDMI OUT button

This sets the HDMI monitor output. (v p. 197)

PDIMMER button

Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 258)

QSTATUS button

Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the

display. (v p. 90)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

W1 W2 W3 W4 W5

RZONE SELECT button

These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated

through the remote control unit. (v p. 171, 176)

SZONE2 ON/OFF button

This turns the power of ZONE2 on/off. (v p. 171)

TZONE3 ON/OFF button

This turns the power of ZONE3 on/off. (v p. 171)

UHeadphones jack (PHONES)

This is used to connect headphones.

When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer

be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT

connectors.

NOTE

To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using

headphones.

VSETUP MIC jack

This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.

(v p. 215)

WUSB port

This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)

and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 74)

XAUX1 HDMI connector

This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video

camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 71)

YAUX1 INPUT connector

Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video

camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 71)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Display

oMain Display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

nStandard display

w eq

ALight illumination

When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding area is lit

blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on.

(v p. 167)

BVolume indicator

CInput source indicator

The currently selected input source name is displayed.

If the input source name has been changed using “Source

Rename” (v p. 210) in the menu, the input source name after the

change is displayed.

nTuner display

These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source

is set to “Tuner”.

DLights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.

EIn the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nSleep timer indicator

FThis lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 157)

nZONE2/ZONE3 power on display

u i

GThis lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on.

(v p. 171)

HThis lights up when ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned on.

(v p. 171)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSub Display

iuoyt

rewq

GH I

JKL

AInput signal indicators

The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.

(v p. 211)

BDecoder indicators

These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or

DTS decoder is running.

CAudyssey® indicator

This lights when “MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”,

“Audyssey DSX®” or “Audyssey LFCTM” is set. (v p. 188 - 191)

DTuner reception mode indicators

These light up according to the reception conditions when the input

source is set to “Tuner”.

TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.

STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.

RDS : Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.

EMonitor output indicator

These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to

“Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection status.

FMULTI ZONE indicator

This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned

on. (v p. 171)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Q0 Q1 Q2

iuo

GSleep timer indicator

This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 158)

HMUTE indicator

This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 87, 172)

IVolume indicator

JInformation display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other

information are displayed here.

KFront speaker indicator

This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

LInput/output signal channel indicators

The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the

setting configured for “Channel Indicators”. (v p. 258)

0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)

These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.

0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”

These light corresponding to the channels that include the input

signals.

When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a

signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,

center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE

channel) is input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Rear panel

ew ytuioq

qQ1Q0

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

ew ytq

qrui

ABluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors

Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless

connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when

connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 80)

APlace the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity

evenly over the screw terminal of rear.

BTurn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.

CRotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

qwe

BSIGNAL GND terminal

Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 72)

CAnalog audio connectors (AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.

(v p. 69)

D7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN)

Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output

connectors. (v p. 73)

EHDMI connectors

Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.

(v p. 64)

FUNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connectors

Used to connect a power amp with UNBALANCED RCA input

connectors. (v p. 48)

GVideo connectors (VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.

(v p. 66)

HComponent video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.

(v p. 66)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oQ1Q0

INETWORK connector

Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN

network. (v p. 79)

JUSB port

This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)

and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 74)

KAC inlet (AC IN)

Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 84)

LFM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)

Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 77)

MBALANCED XLR IN terminals

Used to connect devices equipped with BALANCED XLR output

terminals. (v p. 68)

NFLASHER IN jack

Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control

this unit.

OREMOTE CONTROL jacks

Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this

unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 81)

PDigital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.

(v p. 47)

QBalanced XLR OUT terminals

Used to connect a power amp with BALANCED XLR input terminals.

(v p. 46)

RDC OUT jack

Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function.

(v p. 83)

SRS-232C connector

Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with

RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner’s manual of the home

automation controller for more information about serial control of this

unit.

Perform the operation below beforehand.

ATurn on the power of this unit.

BTurn off the power of this unit from the external controller.

CCheck that the unit is in the standby mode.

NOTE

Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic

discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote control unit

qw e

ADisplay

ALEARN indicator

This is lit when setting the learning function for the remote control

unit. (v p. 272)

BInformation display

0This displays “AVP” when operating this unit.

0This displays the input source name when operating an external

device.

0This displays “TV” when operating TV.

Cl indicator

This is lit when signals are sent from the remote control unit.

BAVP operation button

When preset codes are registered to the remote control unit, press this

button and then operate the menu on the unit.

CSET button

This is used for various settings on the remote control unit.

(v p. 264, 272, 275, 276)

DZONE SELECT button

These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated

through the remote control unit. (v p. 171, 176)

EDevice operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)

These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus.

Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.

(v p. 265)

FInput source select buttons

These select the input source. (v p. 86, 171)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Q11

GSLEEP button

This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 157)

HChannel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)

These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages.

(v p. 90, 108)

IInformation button (INFO)

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 259)

JCursor buttons (uio p)

These select items. (v p. 176)

KBACK button

This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 176)

LHOME button

This takes you to the Home screen (Top screen) when the input source

is Online Music or iPod/USB. (v p. 90)

MSystem buttons

These perform playback related operations. (v p. 90)

0Skip buttons (8, 9)

0Play button (1)

0Search buttons (6, 7)

0Pause button (3)

0Stop button (2)

Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)

These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 102)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

NSMART SELECT buttons (1 - 4)

These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,

volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 159)

OSOUND MODE buttons

These select the sound mode. (v p. 139)

0MOVIE button

0MUSIC button

0GAME button

0PURE button

PNumber buttons

These enter numbers into the unit. (v p. 102)

QRemote control signal transmitter

This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 11)

RPOWER button (X)

This turns the power on/off. (v p. 86, 171)

STV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)

These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.

Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.

(v p. 268)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TTV operation buttons (TV X / TV INPUT)

These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.

Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.

(v p. 268)

ULight button

This turns on the backlight for approx. 2 seconds. (v p. 275)

VVOLUME buttons (df)

These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 87, 172)

WMUTE button (:)

This mutes the output audio. (v p. 87, 172)

XOPTION button

This displays the option menu on the TV screen. (v p. 128)

YENTER button

This determines the selection. (v p. 176)

ZSETUP button

This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 176)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents

Connecting a power amp 36

Connecting a TV 63

Connecting a playback device 67

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 74

Connecting an FM/AM antenna 77

Connecting to a home network (LAN) 79

Connecting an external control device 81

Connecting the power cord 84

NOTE

0Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.

However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the

“Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making

connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do

not conduct current.)

0Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in

noise.

oCables used for connections

Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to

connect.

Speaker cable

Subwoofer cable

HDMI cable

Component video cable

Video cable

Coaxial digital cable

Optical cable

Audio cable

XLR cable

LAN cable

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Connections

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a power amp

This section describes how to install speakers and connect them to this unit.

Speaker installation

Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you

are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.

Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical

installation.

FL FR

SBL SBR

SW1

SW2

FWL FWR

SL SR

FL/FR (Front

speaker left/right):

Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal

distance from the main listening position. The distance

between each speaker and your TV should also be the

same.

C (Center

speaker):

Place the CENTER speaker in between the front

speakers and above or below your TV.

SL/SR (Surround

speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an

equal distance to the left and right sides of the main

listening position. If you don’t have surround back

speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind

your listening position.

SBL/SBR(Surround back

speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers

an equal distance from the main listening position and

directly behind the main listening position. When using

a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly

behind the listening position.

FWL/FWR

(Front wide speakers left/

right):

Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers

outside of the front left and right speakers so that there

is an equal distance between all front speakers.

SW 1/2 (Subwoofer) :

Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near

the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place

them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

FHL FHR

TRR

TRL

TFR

TFL

RHL RHR

TMR

TML

FHL/FHR (Front

height speaker left/

right):

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers

directly above the front speakers. Mount them as

close to the ceiling as possible and aim them

towards the main listening position.

TFL/TFR (Top front

speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on

the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening

position and aligned with the left and right front

speakers.

TML/TMR (Top

middle speaker left/

right):

Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers

directly above the main listening position and

aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TRL/TRR (Top rear

speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on

the ceiling slightly behind your main listening

position and aligned with the left and right front

speakers.

RHL/RHR (Rear

height speaker left/

right):

Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers

directly behind the main listening position. Mount

them as close to the ceiling as possible and

aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

FL FR

SL SR

SHL/SHR (Surround

height left/right):

Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right

speakers directly above the surround speakers.

(Top surround):

Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly

above the main listening position and aligned with

the center channel speaker.

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

FDL FDR

BDL BDR

SDL SDR

FDL/FDR (Front

Dolby speaker left/

right):

Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled

integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby

Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front

speaker.

SDL/SDR (Surround

Dolby speaker left/

right):

Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled

speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby

Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround

speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

instead of the surround speaker.

BDL/BDR (Back

Dolby speaker left/

right):

Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on

the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos

Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back

speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

instead of the surround back speaker.

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow

the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward-

pointing speaker that is placed on the floor.

You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where

speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX®, Dolby Atmos, DTS Neo:X and DTS:X

which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation. (v p. 321, 322,

326)

When using Audyssey DSX®, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.

0Dolby Atmos is not supported in a 5.1ch or less speaker configuration.

Update (DTS:X)

0DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.

0DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

0Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be

installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

Point slightly

downwards

Front height

speaker

z1 30° - 45°

z4 125° - 150°

z2 30° - 55° z3 65° - 100°

z5 135° - 150°

GViewed from the sideH

Top middle speaker

Top front speaker Top rear speaker

Front speaker Surround

speaker

Surround

back

speaker

Front wide

speaker

Point slightly

downwards

Rear height

speaker

TRL

RHL RHR

FHL

TML

TFL

TRR

FHR

TMR

TFR

Height speakers layout

GViewed from the topH

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

z1 30° - 45°

GViewed from the sideH

Front speaker

Surround

speaker

Point slightly

downwards

Front height

speaker

Top surround speaker

Surround

height speaker

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

SHRSHL

FHL

FHR

Height speakers layout

GViewed from the topH

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWhen 7.1-channel speakers are installed using

surround back speakers

z2z3

SW C

SBL

SBR

Listening

position

z1:22° - 30° z2:90° - 110° z3:135° - 150°

When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening

position.

oWhen 9.1-channel speakers are installed using

front wide speakers

z2z1z4

SBL SBR

SW C

FWL FWR

z1: 22° - 30° z2: 55° - 60° z3: 90° - 110° z4: 135° - 150°

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWhen 5.1-channel speakers are installed

SW C

z1:22° - 30° z2:120°

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oLayout including height speakers and ceiling

speakers

nHeight speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height

speakers.

FHL FHR

FL FR

SL SR

RHL RHR

nCeiling speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top rear speakers.

TRR

TRL

TFR

TFL

FL FR

SL SR

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nDolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby

speakers.

FL FR

FDL FDR

SL SR

SDL SDR

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

nAuro-3D layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel speakers with Front Height/Surround

Height/Top Surround.

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

FL FR

SL SR

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup

in place of surround height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a power amp

0Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT connector of

this unit.

0This unit has UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connector and

BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector. Connect to the correct

connector for your power amp. If your power amp has both connectors,

connect to either of them.

0Connect the speakers to the power amp.

0For details on speaker connections, see the User Guide for the power

amp.

0This section shows how to make a 11.1-channel connection.

For how to make other speaker connections, see page 50.

GAV8802 BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector PIN arrangementH

AGND (Ground)

BHOT (+)

CCOLD (–)

The PIN arrangement in this device uses the European method.

In the USA method, B is COLD, and C is HOT.

When connecting a device that utilizes the USA type of PIN arrangement,

replace the B and C plugs on one side of the balanced cable.

NOTE

0Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD and GND for use.

0Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the

speakers.

Also, turn off the power amp and subwoofer.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oExample of connections to Marantz MM8077 power amp

nConnecting the UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connector

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FWR FWL FHR FHL

SBLSBR

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nConnecting the BALANCED XLR PRE OUT connector

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SR SL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FWR FWL FHR FHL

SW SBLSBR

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAbout the cable labels (supplied) for channel

identification

Channel Color

FRONT L White

FRONT R Red

CENTER Green

SURROUND L Light blue

SURROUND R Blue

SURROUND BACK L Beige

SURROUND BACK R Brown

FRONT WIDE L Light Yellow

FRONT WIDE R Yellow

FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow

FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow

TOP FRONT L Light Yellow

TOP FRONT R Yellow

TOP MIDDLE L Light Yellow

TOP MIDDLE R Yellow

TOP REAR L Light Yellow

TOP REAR R Yellow

REAR HEIGHT L Light Yellow

REAR HEIGHT R Yellow

FRONT DOLBY L Light Yellow

FRONT DOLBY R Yellow

SURROUND DOLBY L Light Yellow

SURROUND DOLBY R Yellow

BACK DOLBY L Light Yellow

BACK DOLBY R Yellow

SUBWOOFER Black

Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.

This makes it easier to connect the speakers to the power amp.

G How to attach the cable labels H

Speaker Power amp

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings

This system configuration plays back 11-channels. You can create speaker systems such as a bi-amp connection by changing the “Amp Assign” settings.

Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 223)

Playback speaker in MAIN ZONE “Amp Assign” settings Connection page

5.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 53

7.1-channel playback (surround back) 11.1ch (Default) 54

9.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 55

11.1-channel playback 11.1ch (Default) 57

9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 9.1ch (Bi-Amp) 58

9.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit 9.1ch + Front B 59

Dolby Atmos playback Dolby Atmos 60

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

You can enjoy regardless of the speaker configuration.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Playback speaker in each zone “Amp Assign” settings Connection

page

MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3

Auro-3D Not used Not used Auro-3D 62

The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Relationship between sound modes and channel output”

(v p. 309) for the sound modes that are supported.

The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

In addition to the connections described in (v p. 53 - 61), this unit allows for

various speaker connections with the “Amp Assign” setting.

Also refer to the menu screen in “View Terminal Config.” on the “Amp Assign” setting

screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.

Back

Speakers/Amp Assign

RCA

Assign Mode

-Height Speakers

-Layout

11.1ch

4 Height Speakers

Top Front & Top Rear

XLR

FRONT SURROUNDCENTER SURR.BACK F.WIDE F.HEIGHT T.REAR

SUBWOOFER

FRONT F.WIDE

T.FRONT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

T.REAR

SURROUND

SURR.BACK

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oStandard configuration and connection

Up to 11.2-channels can be connected by using either UNBALANCED

RCA connectors or BALANCED XLR connectors.

When using UNBALANCED RCA connectors for connection, set the

input change switch to “UNBALANCED” on MM8077.

When using BALANCED XLR connectors for connection, set the input

change switch to “BALANCED” on MM8077.

This example explains how to make a connection when using

UNBALANCED RCA connectors.

n5.1-channel playback

This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

SW C

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

BALANCEDBALANCED

UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED

SW SR SL FR FLC

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback (surround back)

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

SW C

SBRSBL

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SW SR SL FR FLC SBLSBR

【MM8077 】

When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L

connector.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n9.1-channel playback (front height)

This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time.

FHL

SW C

SBL

FHR

SBR

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FHLFHR

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n9.1-channel playback (front wide)

SW C

SBL

SBR

FWL FWR

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FWLFWR

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdvanced connections

n11.1-channel playback

This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to

11.1-channels at the same time.

You can connect speakers for up to 13-channels for MAIN ZONE.

When you connect speakers for 12 or more channels, the output

speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound

mode.

FL FR

SBL SBR

FWL FWR

TRR

TRL

TFR

TFL

SL SR

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

TRR TRL TFR TFL

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)

This system plays back 9.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp

connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to

connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer

terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection

enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the

woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality,

producing a higher sound quality.

FHL

SW C

SBL

FHR

SBR

(Bi-Amp)

NOTE

When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or

wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.

wqwq

(R) (L)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

FLFR

SW SR SLSBR SBLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FHR FHL

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n9.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit

This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

FHL

SW C

SBL

FHR

SBR

FLFL

(B) (A) FRFR

(A) (B)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

FHR FHL FR

(B) FL

(B) FR

(A) FL

(A)

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDolby Atmos

This speaker configuration is optimized for Dolby Atmos playback.

n11.1-channel system

This system configuration plays back 11.1-channels.

FL FR

SBL SBR

TRR

TRL

TFR

TFL

SL SR

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

TFR TFL TRR TRL

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n9.1-channel system

This system configuration plays back 9.1-channels.

FL FR

SBL SBR

SL SR

TMR

TML

0When using front height and rear height speakers for Dolby Atmos playback, set

“Assign Mode” to either “9.1ch” or “11.1ch”, and set “Height Speakers” to “4 Height

Speakers”.

0When using Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers for Dolby Atmos playback, set

“Assign Mode” to either “9.1ch” or “11.1ch”, and set “Height Speakers” to “Using

Dolby Speakers”.

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SLSBR SBL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

TMR TML

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oAuro-3D

This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.

n9.1/10.1-channel system

Top surround speaker is optional for Auro-3D.

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

FL FR

SL SR

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup

in place of surround height speakers.

When using the rear height speakers, set “Assign Mode” to “9.1ch” or “11.1ch”.

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL7

(C)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL1

(FL)

CHANNEL2

(FR)

CHANNEL3

(SL)

CHANNEL4

(SR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

CHANNEL5

(SBL)

CHANNEL6

(SBR)

SW SR SL FR FLC

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

TS FHL SHR SHL

FHR

【MM8077 】

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a TV

Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.

How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.

ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

Yes

Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?

Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?

Yes No

“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI

connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio

Return Channel)” (v p. 64)

“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI

connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio

Return Channel)” (v p. 65)

“Connection 3 : TV equipped without

an HDMI connector” (v p. 66)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC

(Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.

Set “HDMI Control” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 199)

When using the HDMI control function, connect to the HDMI

MONITOR 1 connector.

(ARC)

HDMI

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC

(Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT IN

HDMI

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

BPR

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a playback device

This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors

(HDMI, digital audio and audio).

Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.

If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.

In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 69)

0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 70)

0“Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v p. 71)

0“Connecting a turntable” (v p. 72)

0“Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector” (v p. 73)

0Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.

0The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how

to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 208)

0To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 197)

0To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nConnecting the balanced XLR IN terminal

This unit is equipped with BALANCED XLR IN terminals. Use these terminals if your device has an XLR terminal as an audio output terminal.

When using BALANCED XLR IN terminals, assign “XLR” for “Input Assign” – “ANALOG”. (v p. 209) By default, these terminals are disabled.

G AV8802 BALANCED XLR IN terminal PIN arrangement H

AGND (Ground)

BHOT (+)

CCOLD (–)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

OUT

HDMI OUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBPR

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

or or

Satellite tuner/

Cable TV

Satellite tuner/

Cable TV

(HDMI incompatible device)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray disc player as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

AUDIO

OUT OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBPR

OUT

COAXIAL

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

(HDMI incompatible device)

or or

DVD player Blu-ray Disc

player

DVD player

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a video camcorder or game console

This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.

Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.

OUT

HDMI

AUDIO

OUT OUT

VIDEO

Video

camcorder

Video camcorder

(HDMI incompatible device)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a turntable

This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving

coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.

If you set this unit’s input source to “Phono” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise

from the speakers.

NOTE

The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding

purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can

be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line

may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary

to connect the ground line.

GND

AUDIO

OUT

(MM cartridge)

Turntable

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector

You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video.

To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set “Input Mode” (v p. 211) to “7.1CH IN”.

SUB-

WOOFER

CENTER SURROUND

BACK

FRONT

AUDIO

SURROUND

Devices with a multi-channel output connector

(Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player,

External decoder etc.)

The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player. “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 70)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.

For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (v p. 88) or “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 93).

GFront panelH

iPod

USB memory

device

GRear panelH

iPod

USB memory

device

Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use

that device’s supplied AC adapter.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

NOTE

0You cannot use the USB ports on the front panel and rear panel simultaneously. Select and connect the USB port to use. (v p. 91)

0USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.

0It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.

0Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSupported iPod/iPhone models

• iPod classic

• iPod nano

• iPod touch

• iPhone

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an FM/AM antenna

Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to

the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the

antenna in this location. (“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 102))

If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an

outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.

NOTE

0Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.

0Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the

panel.

AM loop antenna

(supplied)

FM indoor antenna

(supplied)

White

Black

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oUsing the AM loop antenna

Suspending on a wall

Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Nail, tack, etc.

Standing alone

Use the procedure shown above to assemble.

When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.

oAM loop antenna assembly

1Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop

antenna from the rear and bend it forward.

2Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the

stand.

Projecting part

Square hole

Stand

Loop antenna

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.

You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various

types of playback and operations as described below.

0Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media

server(s)

0Playback of music content from online streaming services

0Using the Apple AirPlay function

0Operation on this unit via the network

0Firmware Update

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service

Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the

router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

Internet

Modem

Router

To WAN side

To LAN port

NAS

(Network Attached

Storage)

LAN port/ Ethernet

connector

LAN port/ Ethernet

connector

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wireless LAN

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external

antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel

and stand them upright.

See “Wi-Fi Setup” (v p. 248) on how to connect to a wireless LAN

router.

Internet

Modem

To WAN side

Router with access point

0When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following

functions:

0Built-in DHCP server

This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.

0Built-in 100BASE-TX switch

When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a

speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

0Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics

stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

0The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.

If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be

affected by noise.

0When using a router that supports the WPS （Wi-Fi Protected Setup） function, Wi-

Fi connection can be carried out easily.

0When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the

IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v p. 247)

NOTE

0The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a

computer shop for details.

0This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if

your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.

0Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet

connector on your computer.

0Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

oPerforming operations by RC on this unit

without visual contact

You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL

connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote

control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is

hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can’t directly point with the

remote control unit to the device.

To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function

(“Remote lock function” (v p. 166)).

RC OUT

IR receiver

NOTE

When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform

operations with the remote control unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oRemotely connecting Marantz devices

When you are using a Marantz device other than this unit that supports

remote connection, you can transmit remote control signals just by

connecting the device to the REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT connector

with a monaural cable.

Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the

connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this

feature.

EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUTIN

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUTIN

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUTIN

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT IN

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT IN

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DC OUT jacks

When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.

The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical signal.

12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device

NOTE

0Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.

0If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power

to the unit, and disconnect DC OUT jack.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting the power cord

After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

(AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

To household power outlet

Power cord (supplied)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents

Basic operation

Turning the power on 86

Selecting the input source 86

Adjusting the volume 87

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 87

Selecting a sound mode 139

Playback a device

Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 87

Playing an iPod 88

Playing a USB memory device 93

Playing a Bluetooth device 98

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 101

Playback network audio/service

Listening to Internet Radio 112

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 116

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site 120

AirPlay function 124

Spotify Connect function 127

Convenience functions

Convenience functions 128

HDMI control function 156

Sleep timer function 157

Smart select function 159

Panel lock function 164

Remote lock function 166

Switches light illumination on/off 167

Other functions

Web control function 162

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) 168

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Playback

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Basic operation

VOLUME df

POWER X

MUTE :

Input source

select buttons

Turning the power on

1Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

0You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to

turn on the power.

0You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.

Selecting the input source

1Press the input source select button to be played back.

The desired input source can be selected directly.

You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume

1Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.

0The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.

0You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily

(Muting)

1Press MUTE :.

0“MUTE” appears on the display.

0: appears on the TV screen.

0The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 187)

0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc

player

The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc

player.

1Prepare for playback.

ATurn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.

BChange the TV input to the input of this unit.

2Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

3Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a

player used for playback.

4Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

oSurround playback (v p. 139)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing an iPod

iPod/USB

OPTION

uio p

ENTER

BACK

HOME

CH/PAGE df

8 9

6 7

0You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod

with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.

0For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this

unit, see “Supported iPod/iPhone models” (v p. 76).

0See “AirPlay function” (v p. 124) on how to play a music file saved on

an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to music on an iPod

1Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 74)

2Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/

USB”.

0Select the USB port to be used. (v p. 91)

The USB port on the front panel can be used by default.

0“Browse from iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.

0Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.

3Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play

back music.

0“iPod Browse Mode” has two modes, “From iPod” and “On-Screen”. By default,

“From iPod”, where you operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen, is

set.

0To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod

information displayed on the TV screen, see “iPod Browse Mode settings”

(v p. 90).

NOTE

0Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not

operate.

0Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems

arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.

oOperations accessible through the option

This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” (v p. 90) is

set to “From iPod”.

0“Setting the USB port to use (USB Select)” (v p. 91)

0“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 90)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 137)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

iPod Browse Mode settings

In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are

displayed on the TV screen.

This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in

“On-Screen”.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “iPod/USB”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.

The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.

3Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER.

0Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed

below.

iPod Browse Mode From iPod On-Screen

Playable

files

Music file P P

Video file z

Active

buttons

Remote control

unit (This unit) P P

iPod P

zOnly the sound is played.

4Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press

ENTER.

Playback starts.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

3Pause

2Stop

8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

ENTER Playback / Pause

(Press and hold) Stop

u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list

display

HOME Go to Home screen

0The actions of the operation buttons may differ.

0The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time

the main unit’s STATUS is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode” set

to “On-Screen”.

0English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible

characters are displayed as “.” (period).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option

This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “On-

Screen”. (v p. 90)

0“Setting the USB port to use (USB Select)” (v p. 91)

0“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 90)

0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 92)

0“Performing random playback” (v p. 92)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Setting the USB port to use (USB

Select)

nSupported input sources:

iPod/USB

1Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “USB Select”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select the USB port to use.

Front

(Default):Uses the USB port on the front panel.

Rear: Uses the USB port on the rear panel.

4Press ENTER.

The display returns to the playback screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Performing repeat playback

1Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-

Screen”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

Off

(Default) : Repeat playback mode is canceled.

One: A file being played is played

repeatedly.

All: All files in the folder currently being

played are played repeatedly.

4Press ENTER.

The display returns to the playback screen.

“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.

Performing random playback

1Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-

Screen”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off

(Default):Disable random playback.

On: Randomly play back all tracks in the

current playback folder.

4Press ENTER.

The display returns to the playback screen.

0During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another

track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s

possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random

playback.

0“Random” settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing a USB memory device

iPod/USB

OPTION

uio p

ENTER

BACK

HOME

CH/PAGE df

8 9

6 7

0Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB

memory device.

0Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards

can be played on this unit.

0This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or

“FAT32” format.

0The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit

for playback are as follows.

See “Playback a USB memory device” for details. (v p. 305)

0WMA

0MP3

0WAV

0MPEG-4 AAC

0FLAC

0ALAC

0AIFF

0DSD

0JPEG

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing files stored on USB memory

devices

1Connect the USB memory device to the USB port.

(v p. 74)

2Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/

USB”.

Folder1

Folder2

Folder3

Music1

Music2

Music3

Music4

OPTION

USB [1/9]

Option

Select the USB port to be used. (v p. 91) The USB port on the

front panel can be used by default.

3Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press

ENTER.

Playback starts.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

3Pause

2Stop

8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

ENTER Playback / Pause

(Press and hold) Stop

u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list

display

HOME Go to Home screen

When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while

playing the file.

0This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the

folder.

NOTE

Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with

the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB

memory device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Setting the USB port to use (USB Select)” (v p. 91)

0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 129)

0“Performing random playback” (v p. 129)

0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 131)

0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 132)

0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 137)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

Bluetooth

BACK

ENTER

8 9

6 7

OPTION

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital

music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting

this unit with the Bluetooth device.

Communication is possible up to a range of about 10 m.

NOTE

To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support

the A2DP profile.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing with a Bluetooth device

In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth

device must first be paired with this unit.

Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired

again.

1Prepare for playback.

AConnect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless

connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors

on the rear panel. (v p. 29)

BPress POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

2Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to

“Bluetooth”.

OPTION

Bluetooth

Music

Device

Now Playing

Artist

Album

Option

When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode

automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit.

3Select this unit when its name appears in the list of

devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth

device.

At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of

this unit.

0Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed

on the display of the unit.

Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit

(about 1 m).

0When connecting a second Bluetooth device, press and hold Bluetooth for

approximately 3 seconds or select “Pairing Mode” from the options menu to pair

the device. (v p. 100)

0This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th

Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered

device.

0When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same

number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”

for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.

0Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth

device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing a Bluetooth device

Check the following before you play back music.

0The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth device must be turned on

0Pairing must be completed

1Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to

“Bluetooth”.

The unit will automatically connect to the most recently used

Bluetooth device.

2Start playing the Bluetooth device.

0The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote

control of this unit.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

3Pause

2Stop

8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

ENTER Playback / Pause

(Press and hold) Stop

u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically

switched to “Bluetooth” if a Bluetooth device is connected.

0When the “IP Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a Bluetooth

device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be

turned on automatically. (v p. 251)

0Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title

name, Artist name, Album name, etc.

0English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible

characters are displayed as “.” (period).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

NOTE

0To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth

device needs to support the AVRCP profile.

0The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.

0Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled

to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Pairing with the Pairing Mode” (v p. 100)

0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 129)

0“Performing random playback” (v p. 129)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing with the Pairing Mode

Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Bluetooth”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Pairing Mode”, then press ENTER.

The device will go into the pairing mode.

3Select this unit when its name appears in the list of

devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth

device.

At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of

this unit.

0When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same

number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”

for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.

0Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth

device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

100

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

TUNE +, –

TUNER

OPTION

uio p

ENTER

BACK

CH/PAGE df

0 – 9

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and

AM broadcasts.

Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this

unit first.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

101

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

1Connect the antenna. (“Connecting an FM/AM

antenna” (v p. 77))

2Press TUNER to switch the input source to “Tuner”.

G TV screen H

TUNE+/-

STEREO AUTO

CH /

OPTION

Tuner

FM 87.50MHz

Now Playing

Tune Preset Option

CH 1

G Display of this unit H

3Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.

This displays the reception band input screen.

5Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.

FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.

6Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want

listen to.

Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When

it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically

searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in using

buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also use

“Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.

In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.

If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.

Operation buttons Function

TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)

CH/PAGE d fSelects preset radio stations

0 – 9 Preset channel selection/Direct frequency tuning

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

102

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 104)

0“RDS search” (v p. 104)

0“PTY search” (v p. 105)

0“TP search” (v p. 106)

0“Radio Text” (v p. 106)

0“Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 107)

0“Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset

Memory)” (v p. 107)

0“Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset

Memory)” (v p. 108)

0“Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset

Name)” (v p. 109)

0“Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 110)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

103

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tuning in by entering the frequency

(Direct Tune)

You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.

The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.

3Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.

0If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.

4Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio

station you want to hear.

5When setting is completed, press ENTER.

The preset frequency is tuned in.

RDS search

RDS is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional

information along with the regular radio program signal.

Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS

service.

Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible

stations.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “RDS Search”, then press ENTER.

3Press ENTER.

The search for RDS stations begins automatically.

If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the

display, you can search for a different station.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

104

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

PTY search

Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program

type (PTY).

PTY identifies the type of RDS program.

The program types and their displays are as follows:

NEWS News WEATHER Weather

AFFAIRS Current Affairs FINANCE Finance

INFO Information CHILDREN Children’s program

SPORT Sports SOCIAL Social Affairs

EDUCATE Education RELIGION Religion

DRAMA Drama PHONE IN Phone In

CULTURE Culture TRAVEL Travel

SCIENCE Science LEISURE Leisure

VARIED Varied JAZZ Jazz Music

POP M Pop Music COUNTRY Country Music

ROCK M Rock Music NATION M National Music

EASY M Easy Listening Music OLDIES Oldies Music

LIGHT M Light Classical FOLK M Folk Music

CLASSICS Serious Classical DOCUMENT Documentary

OTHER M Other Music

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “PTY Search”, then press ENTER.

3Use ui to call out the desired program type.

4Press ENTER.

PTY search begins automatically.

If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the

display, you can search for a different station.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

105

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TP search

TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.

This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area

before leaving home.

Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs (TP

stations).

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “TP Search”, then press ENTER.

3Press ENTER.

TP search begins automatically.

If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the

display, you can search for a different station.

Radio Text

RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display.

“Radio text” appears on the display when radio text data is received.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Radio text”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select “On”, then press ENTER.

0While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data

broadcast from the station is displayed.

0If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

106

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you

cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to

“Manual” and tune in manually.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.

Auto: Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio

station.

Manual: Manually change the frequency one step at a time each

time the button is pressed.

Tuning in to stations and presetting

them automatically (Auto Preset

Memory)

A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press

ENTER.

3Press ENTER.

The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset

them.

0When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about

5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.

The preset memory is overwritten.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

107

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Presetting the current broadcast

station (Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them

in easily.

Up to 56 stations can be preset.

1Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.

(“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 102))

2Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

3Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.

The list of already preset channels is displayed.

4Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to

preset, then press ENTER.

The current broadcast station that is preset.

0To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Channel Default settings

1 – 8 87.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /

90.10 MHz

9 – 16 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

17 – 24 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

25 – 32 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

33 – 40 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

41 – 48 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

49 – 56 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10

MHz

Listening to preset stations

1Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset

channel.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

108

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specify a name for the preset

broadcast station (Preset Name)

You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.

Up to eight characters can be input.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.

The Preset Name screen is displayed.

3Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station

you want to name.

4Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to

name, then press ENTER.

5Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.

The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.

0If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the

frequency.

6Enter the characters, then press “OK”.

0For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 178).

7Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

109

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Skipping preset broadcast stations

(Preset Skip)

Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can

be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier

by skipping unnecessary memories.

1Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.

The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.

3nTo set the stations you want to skip by groups

AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to

skip.

BPress u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.

Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the

selected group “z-z”.

(z is the selected group number.)

nTo set the stations you want to skip by

stations

AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want

to skip.

BUse ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.

CUse o p to select “Skip”.

The station you selected is not displayed.

4Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

110

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Cancelling Preset Skip

1Use o p to select a group containing a broadcast

station to cancel the skip for while the “Preset Skip ”

screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip

for.

3Use o p to select “On”.

The skip is cancelled.

NOTE

Preset skip cannot be cancelled for groups.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

111

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio

INTERNET

RADIO

ONLINE

MUSIC

OPTION

uio p

ENTER

BACK

HOME

CH/PAGE df

0Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.

Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.

0The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided

by vTuner radio station.

0The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for

playback are as follows.

See “Playing an Internet Radio Station” (v p. 308) for details.

0WMA

0MP3

0MPEG-4 AAC

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

112

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio

1Prepare for playback.

0Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 79))

2Press ONLINE MUSIC.

0You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source

“Internet Radio” directly.

3Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press

ENTER.

Favorites Internet Radio

Media Server

Online Music

4Use ui to select the search method for the radio

station that you wish to playback and then press

ENTER.

Name of country: Select the various regions.

Displays typical Internet Radio stations.

Search Stations : Displays all Internet Radio stations that

this unit can tune in to.

Search Podcasts : Displays Internet Radio stations in the

podcasts that this unit can tune in to.

Recommended

Stations :

Displays recommended Internet Radio

stations.

radiomarantz.com :

Displays Internet Radio stations added to

favorites in vTuner. For instructions on

how to add to favorites in vTuner, see

“Using vTuner to add Internet Radio

stations to favorites” (v p. 115).

Recently Played :

Displays recently played Internet Radio

stations. Up to 20 stations can be stored

in “Recently Played”.

Search by Keyword :

Displays Internet Radio stations

searched by keyword. For character

input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 178).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

113

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

5Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

2Stop

ENTER (Press and hold) Stop

CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list

display

HOME Go to Home screen

0The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the

main unit’s STATUS is pressed.

0Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).

NOTE

The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable

without notice.

Playing the last played Internet Radio

station

1Press INTERNET RADIO.

The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio

station plays.

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 131)

0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 132)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

114

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio

stations to favorites

There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune

into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be

difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then

please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically

designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio

stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations

added to vTuner.

1Check the MAC address of this unit.

(“Information” (v p. 247))

0The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for

vTuner.

2Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://

www.radiomarantz.com).

3Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.

4Enter your E-mail address and a password of your

choice.

5Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,

etc.) of your choice.

0You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to

hear.

6Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and

then click the Add to Favorites icon.

7Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.

A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is

created.

0Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played

from “radiomarantz.com” (v p. 113) with this unit.

You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

115

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

OPTION

ONLINE

MUSIC

uio p

ENTER

BACK

HOME

CH/PAGE df

8 9

6 7

0This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a

PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.

0The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server

using technologies shown below.

Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service

0The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit

for playback are as follows.

For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or

NAS” (v p. 307).

0WMA

0MP3

0WAV

0MPEG-4 AAC

0FLAC

0ALAC

0AIFF

0DSD

0JPEG

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

116

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Applying media sharing settings

Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.

If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.

oWhen using Windows Media Player 12

(Windows 7 / Windows 8)

1Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.

2Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.

3Select “Allowed” in the “Marantz AV8802” drop-down

list.

4Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media

programs on this PC and remote connections...”.

5Follow the screen instructions to end the setting.

oWhen using Windows Media Player 11

1Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.

2Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.

3Click the “Share my media” check box, select “Marantz

AV8802”, and then click “Allow”.

4As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other

PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media

controller, and then click “Allow”.

5Click “OK” to finish.

oSharing media stored in NAS

Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs

and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For

details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

117

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC and

NAS

Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.

1Prepare for playback.

ACheck the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 79))

BPrepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)

2Press ONLINE MUSIC.

3Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press

ENTER.

Favorites Internet Radio

Online Music

Media Server

4Use ui to select the server including the file to be

played, then press ENTER.

5Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

3Pause

2Stop

8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

ENTER Playback / Pause

(Press and hold) Stop

u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track

(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list

display

HOME Go to Home screen

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

118

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the

main unit’s STATUS is pressed.

0When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album

art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.

0If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files

can be displayed.

0WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,

such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later).

0This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the

folder.

NOTE

0When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless

LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In

this case, connect using a wired LAN.

0Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required

for the file to be displayed.

0The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server

specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the

server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 129)

0“Performing random playback” (v p. 129)

0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 131)

0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time

(Slideshow)” (v p. 132)

0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer)” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 135)

0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 137)

0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

119

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site

OPTION

ONLINE

MUSIC

uio p

ENTER

BACK

HOME

CH/PAGE df

0Flickr is an online photo sharing service. You can use this unit to view

photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not

need an account to use Flickr.

To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account

in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.

For details, see the Flickr homepage.

http://www.flickr.com/

0You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the

photographs shared on Flickr.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

120

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs shared by

particular users

1Prepare for playback.

0Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 79))

2Press ONLINE MUSIC.

3Use uio p to select “Flickr”, then press ENTER.

Favorites Internet Radio

Media Server

Online Music

4Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press

ENTER.

5Enter the screen name that you wish to add to

“Contact” (Screen Name: User name you wish to view).

0For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 178).

6After inputting the “Contact”, press “OK”.

The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name you

entered in step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.

0If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact

you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter

the correct screen name.

7Use ui to select the screen name added to “Contact”,

then press ENTER.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

121

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

8Use ui to select the folder, then press ENTER.

Favorites : Displays the favorite photographs of the

specified user.

Photostream : Displays a list of shared photographs.

PhotoSets : Displays the folder (photograph album) list.

Contacts : Displays the screen name used by the

specified user in Contacts.

Remove this

Contact : Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.

Add this Contact : Adds a user from Flickr Contact.

9Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.

The selected photograph is displayed.

Operation buttons Function

1Playback

2Stop

ENTER Playback

(Press and hold) Stop

u iDisplay previous photograph / Display next

photograph

CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list

display

HOME Go to Home screen

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

122

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing all photographs on Flickr

1Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER.

2Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.

Interestingness :

Displays photographs that are popular from the

number of user comments or number of times

they are added as favorites.

Recent : Displays the most recently added photographs.

Search by text : Search for photographs by keyword.

3Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.

The selected photograph is displayed.

NOTE

Depending on the file format, some photographs may not be viewable.

oOperations accessible through the option

0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 133)

0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture

Mode)” (v p. 137)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

123

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

AirPlay function

Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be

played on this unit via the network.

0X is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.

0Source input will be switched to “Online Music” when AirPlay playback is started.

0You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source.

0To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.

0For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.

0The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

This unit

Router

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

124

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod

touch or iPad

If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can

stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.

1Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the

same network as this unit.

0For details, see your device’s manual.

2Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.

' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

3Tap the AirPlay icon '.

AirPlay

AirDrop

4Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.

Playing iTunes music with this unit

1Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that

is connected to the same network as this unit.

2Turn this unit ON.

Set “IP Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 251)

NOTE

When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby

power.

3Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the

main unit.

4Choose a song and click play in iTunes.

The music will stream to this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

125

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting multiple speakers (devices)

It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible

speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.

1Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”.

2Check the speakers you want to use.

NOTE

In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch,

iPad or iTunes volume setting level.

You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to

playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Perform iTunes playback operations

with the remote control unit of this unit

With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,

pause, and auto search (cue) operations.

1Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.

2Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.

3Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote

speakers”, and then click “OK”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

126

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Spotify Connect function

Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to

Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or

tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or

use other apps - the music never stops.

To try Spotify Premium free for 30 days, or learn more about Connect,

please go to www.spotify.com/connect

Spotify server

Control

This unit

Spotify App

Audio streaming/control

Playing Spotify music with this unit

Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.

To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify

premium account first.

1Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device

in the same network as this unit.

2Launch the Spotify App.

3Play back the Spotify track.

4Tap the F icon to select the unit.

4:440:13

The music will stream to this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

127

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Convenience functions

OPTION

ONLINE

MUSIC

uio p

ENTER

This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for

each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

128

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Performing repeat playback

nSupported input sources :

USB / Media Server / Bluetooth

1While content is playing, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select repeat playback mode.

Off

(Default):Repeat playback mode is canceled.

One: A file being played is played

repeatedly.

All: All files in the folder currently being

played are played repeatedly.

4Press ENTER.

The display returns to the playback screen.

0This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting

under the AVRCP profile.

0“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.

Performing random playback

nSupported input sources :

USB / Media Server / Bluetooth

1While content is playing, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select random playback mode.

Off

(Default):Disable random playback.

On: Randomly play back all tracks in the

current playback folder.

4Press ENTER.

The display returns to the playback screen.

0During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another

track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s

possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random

playback.

0This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting

under the AVRCP profile.

0“Random” settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

129

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Registering to Favorites

You can register a total of 100 favorites.

oSupported input sources:

Internet Radio / Media Server

1While content is playing, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Save to Favorites”, then press

ENTER.

“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to

favorites.

0The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is

completed.

Playing back content added to the

“Save to Favorites”

1Press ONLINE MUSIC.

2Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

Internet Radio

Media Server

Online Music

Favorites

3Use ui to select the content you want to play, then

press ENTER.

Playback starts.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

130

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Deleting content added to favorites

1Press ONLINE MUSIC.

2Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

3Use ui to select the content you want to delete from

favorites, then press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4Use ui to select “Remove from Favorites”, then press

ENTER.

“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is deleted

from favorites.

0The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete

process is complete.

Searching content with keywords (Text

Search)

nSupported input sources :

USB / Internet Radio / Media Server

1While the content is playing, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.

The keyboard input screen is displayed.

3Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or

file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.

0For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 178).

4Use ui to select the content you want to play, then

press ENTER.

Playback starts.

“Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the entered

first character from the displayed list.

NOTE

Text Search may not work for some lists.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

131

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)

nSupported input sources : USB

1Play back a still picture.

0Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices.

(v p. 94)

2Play back a music file. (v p. 94)

3Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.

The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is

shown on the screen.

nSupported input sources :

Internet Radio / Media Server

1Play back a still picture.

0Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 116)

0Play back still pictures stored on Flickr. (v p. 120)

2Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio

station. (v p. 112, 116)

3Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.

The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is

shown on the screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

132

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the Slideshow Interval

Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture

(JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server, or on the

Flickr website.

nSupported input sources :

USB / Media Server / Flickr

1While the list is displayed, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Slideshow Interval”, then press

ENTER.

3Use o p to set the display time.

Off: The slide show is not played back.

5s - 60s

(Default: 5s):

Set the time for displaying a single picture when

playing back images in the slide show.

4Press ENTER.

The “Slideshow Interval” settings are reflected for all input sources.

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and

vocals (Dialog Enhancer)

This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the

dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.

1Press OPTION.

2Use ui to select “Dialog Enhancer”, then press

ENTER.

3Use o p to select your favorite enhancement effect.

Off

(Default):

Does not enhance the dialog or

vocals.

Low / Medium / High: Enhances the dialog and vocals.

4Press ENTER.

“Dialog Enhancer” settings are stored for each source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

133

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume of each channel

to match the input source (Channel

Level Adjust)

The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You

can set this for each input source.

1Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press

ENTER.

The channel level adjust screen is displayed.

3Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.

4Use o p to adjust the volume.

–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of

the various channels to “0.0 dB” (default).

0Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.

0“Channel Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.

0You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set

this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v p. 197)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

134

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.

1Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.

The Tone screen is displayed.

3Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.

On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).

Off

(Default):Playback without tone adjustment.

4Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound

range to be adjusted.

Bass: Adjust bass.

Treble: Adjust treble.

5Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

0“Tone” settings are stored for each input source.

0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

0This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 189)

0You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”

is set to “TV”. (v p. 197)

0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

135

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Displaying your desired video during

audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio

playback. You can set this for each input source.

nSupported input sources:

iPod/USB / CDz / Tuner / Online Music /

Bluetooth / Phono

zThis cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video

connectors are assigned.

1Press OPTION during audio playback.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select the Video Select mode.

Off

(Default):Disable Video Select mode.

On: Enable Video Select mode.

4If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select

“Source”.

5Use o p to select the input source for video you want

to play back, then press ENTER.

“Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

136

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the picture quality for your

viewing environment (Picture Mode)

nSupported input sources :

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 /

AUX2 / Media Player / iPod/USB /

Online Music / CDz / TV Audioz

zYou can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video

connector is assigned.

1Press OPTION during video playback.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.

3Use o p to select picture mode.

Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room

viewing environments.

Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room

such as a theater room.

Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.

brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room

during the day.

ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at

night.

Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.

4Press ENTER.

“Picture Mode” settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

137

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing the same music in all zones (All

Zone Stereo)

You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE

simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (other rooms).

It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in

multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same

BGM in the entire house.

1Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.

3Select “Start”, then press ENTER.

0The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the

same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the

All Zone Stereo mode.

0When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All

Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then

press “Start”.

oStopping the All Zone Stereo mode

1During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press

OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.

3Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.

0The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN

ZONE is turned off.

0In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes

can be selected.

0When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.

(v p. 197)

0When “Input Mode” is set to other than “7.1CH IN”, the All Zone Stereo mode is

available. (v p. 211)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

138

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode

PUREMOVIE

MUSIC GAME

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo

playback modes.

Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by

digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from

internet-based subscription services.

This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio

formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than

multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.

For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

139

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode

1Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies

and TV programs.

MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.

GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

0The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for

its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as

the one selected at the previous playback.

0If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,

the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.

0This can also be set by pressing MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME on the main unit.

oSwitching the sound mode

0Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes

that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,

the sound mode changes.

0While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound

mode.

0Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite

mode.

GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed

MOVIE SOUND

Stereo

DTS Neural:X

Multi Ch Stereo

Virtual

Dolby Surround

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

140

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Direct playback

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

1Press PURE to select “Direct”.

Direct playback begins.

0While DSD signals are played back, “DSD Direct” is displayed.

0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Pure Direct playback

This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback

mode.

This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing

so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.

1Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.

The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.

The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.

0In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.

0Dialog Enhancer (v p. 133)

0Tone (v p. 135)

0M-DAX (v p. 186)

0MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 188)

0Dynamic EQ (v p. 189)

0Dynamic Volume (v p. 190)

0Graphic EQ (v p. 192)

0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

NOTE

0Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct

mode.

0When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5

seconds.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

141

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Auto surround playback

This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically

selects the corresponding mode for playback.

Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input

signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the

respective channel number.

1Press PURE to select “Auto”.

Auto surround playback begins.

This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

142

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDescription of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Dolby Surround This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.

Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Dolby Digital This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.

Dolby TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.

Dolby Digital Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.

Dolby AtmoszThis mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos.

It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers,

creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

zThis mode is not supported in a 5.1ch or less speaker configuration.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

143

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS sound mode

Sound mode type Description

DTS Neo:X This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel

surround sources as a maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound.

The “Music” mode is suitable for playing music, the “Cinema” mode is suitable for playing movies and the “Game” mode is

suitable for playing games.

DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.

DTS ES Dscrt6.1zThis mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.

The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.

Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.

DTS ES Mtrix6.1zThis mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.

The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software

recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,

surround back).

DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.

DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.

DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.

zThis can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 236)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

144

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

Sound mode type Description

DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS:X.

It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating

natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

DTS Neural:X This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.

Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

0You can select DTS:X or DTS Neural:X if updated to DTS:X.

0DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

145

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Auro-3D sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Auro-3D This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for

playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer

called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.

Auro-2D Surround This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals

encoded as Auro-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-

Matic is used to output Surround Sound.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

146

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

PCM multi-channel sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

Audyssey DSX® sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Audyssey DSX® (A-DSX)zThis mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide

or front height channels, the surround sound effects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.

zThis can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”, and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker

Config.”. (v p. 235)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

147

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Original sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.

Stereo audio (2-channel) sources are played back via the front (L/R) speakers, the surround speakers and surround back

speakers (if connected).

Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)

speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.

Auto sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX,

Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches

automatically to the corresponding mode.

If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played

back according to the respective channel number.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

148

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Stereo sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.

0Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.

0When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no

additional surround sound processing.

Direct sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.

Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.

The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.

0Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)

0The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

149

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSound mode that can be selected for each input signal

0The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.

0Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 180)

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

2-channel z1

Stereo SSS

Dolby Surround SSS

DTS Neo:X Cinema z2S

DTS Neo:X Music z2S

DTS Neo:X Game z2S

Multi Ch Stereo SSS

Virtual SSS

z12-channel also includes analog input.

z2This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1 or 11.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are

used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

150

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

Multi-channel z3Stereo SSS

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital SSS

Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround SSS

Dolby Digital A-DSX z4SSS

Dolby Digital + Neo:X Cinema S

Dolby Digital + Neo:X Music S

Dolby Digital + Neo:X Game S

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD SSS

Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z5SSS

Dolby Atmos z6SSS

Dolby TrueHD A-DSX z4SSS

Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Cinema S

Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Music S

Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Game S

z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and

corresponding sound modes” (v p. 317).

z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 191)

z5This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.

z6This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

151

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus SSS

Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z5SSS

Dolby Atmos z6SSS

Dolby Digital Plus A-DSX z4SSS

Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Cinema S

Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Music S

Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Game S

Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos SSS

DTS

DTS Surround SSS

DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 SSS

DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 SSS

DTS 96/24 SSS

DTS + Dolby Surround SSS

DTS Surround A-DSX z4SSS

DTS + Neo:X Cinema S

DTS + Neo:X Music S

DTS + Neo:X Game S

Multi-channel z3

z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and

corresponding sound modes” (v p. 317).

z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 191)

z5This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.

z6This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

152

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

DTS-HD /

DTS Express

DTS-HD HI RES SSS

DTS-HD MSTR SSS

DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX z4SSS

DTS Express SSS

DTS Express A-DSX z4SSS

DTS-HD + Dolby Surround SSS

DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX z4SSS

DTS-HD + Neo:X Cinema S

DTS-HD + Neo:X Music S

DTS-HD + Neo:X Game S

PCM multi-channel

Multi Ch In SSS

Multi Ch In 7.1 SSS

Multi In + Dolby Surround SSS

Multi In A-DSX z4SSS

Multi In + Neo:X Cinema S

Multi In + Neo:X Music S

Multi In + Neo:X Game S

Multi-channel z3Multi Ch Stereo SSS

Virtual SSS

z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and

corresponding sound modes” (v p. 317).

z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 191)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

153

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

2-channel z1 DTS Neural:X z2SSS

DTS:X DTS:X SSS

DTS:X MSTR SSS

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital + Neural:X SSS

Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X SSS

Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X SSS

DTS DTS + Neural:X SSS

DTS-HD/DTS Express DTS-HD + Neural:X SSS

PCM multi-channel Multi Ch In + Neural:X SSS

Multi-channel

z12-channel also includes analog input.

z2This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1 or 9.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.

0You can select DTS:X or DTS Neural:X if updated to DTS:X.

0DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

2-channel z1 /

Multi-channel z3

Auro-3D z7SSS

Auro-2D Surround z8SSS

z12-channel also includes analog input.

z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and

corresponding sound modes” (v p. 317).

z7It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height speakers is used.

z8It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

154

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oViews on the display

Dolby D + S

Blu-ray

q w

AShows a decoder to be used.

0In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “Dolby D +” is

displayed.

BShows a decoder that creates sound output.

0“k” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

155

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HDMI control function

A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with

another device via the HDMI cable connection.

Setting procedure

1Enable the HDMI control function of this unit.

Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 199)

2Turn the power on for all the devices connected by

HDMI cable.

3Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected

by HDMI cable.

0Please consult the operating instructions for the connected

devices to check the settings.

0Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.

4Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected

to this unit.

5Switch the input source of this unit to check that video

from the player connected by HDMI is played back

correctly.

6When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that

the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE

0Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check

the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.

0The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function.

0When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to

“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

156

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sleep timer function

SLEEP

ZONE SELECT

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time

has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to

sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

157

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using the sleep timer

1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or

“ZONE3”.

2Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.

0The sleep timer indicator lights up on the display and the sleep

timer starts.

0You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in

steps of 10 minutes.

oChecking the remaining time

Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.

The remaining time appears on the display.

oTo cancel the sleep timer

Press SLEEP to select “Off”.

The sleep timer indicator on the display turns off.

The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.

NOTE

The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit.

To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the

connected devices themselves.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

158

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Smart select function

SMART

SELECT

1 – 4

ZONE

SELECT

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be

registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.

You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in

subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.

By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,

you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.

The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

159

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Calling up the settings

1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or

“ZONE3”.

2Press SMART SELECT.

The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are

called up.

0The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown

below.

GMAIN ZONEH

Button Input source Volume

SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40

SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40

SMART SELECT 3 Media Player 40

SMART SELECT 4 Online Music 40

GZONE2H / GZONE3H

Button Input source Volume

SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40

SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40

SMART SELECT 3 Media Player 40

SMART SELECT 4 Online Music 40

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

160

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Changing the settings

1Set the items below to the settings you want to

The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN

ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and

ZONE3.

AInput source (v p. 86)

BVolume (v p. 87)

CSound mode (v p. 139)

DAudyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFC™) (v p. 188 -

190)

E“M-DAX” (v p. 186)

F“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 134)

G“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)” (v p. 136)

H“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment

(Picture Mode)” (v p. 137)

I“Video Output” (v p. 197)

Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received or a

track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio

station or track is memorized.

0Tuner / Internet Radio / Media Server / Favorites / iPod/USB

2Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or

“ZONE3”.

3Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until

“Smartz Memory”, “Z2 Smartz Memory” or “Z3

Smartz Memory” appears on the display.

The current settings will be memorized.

z is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you

pressed.

oChanging the Smart Select Name

The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or

display of this unit can be changed to a different name.

For the name change method, see “Smart Select

Names” (v p. 256).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

161

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Web control function

You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

This unit

Router

Tablet

0This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in

order to use the web control function. (“Connecting to a home network

(LAN)” (v p. 79))

0Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able

to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the

security-related software.

Controlling the unit from a web control

1Switch the “IP Control” setting to “Always On”.

(v p. 251)

2Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.

(v p. 247)

Network/Information

Friendly name

Connection

IP Address

MAC Address

Displays the current network settings of the AVP

Ｍarantz AV8802

Wired(Ethernet)

DHCP On

192.168.100.19

zzzzzz

-000000

Checking the IP address.

3Start up the web browser.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

162

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

4Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address

box.

For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter

“http://192.168.100.19”.

http://192.168.100.19

File Edit View Tools HelpFavorites

5When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu

item you want to operate.

MAIN ZONE

CBL/SAT

ZONE2

Online Music

Load

AV8802

Audio

Setup Menu

Video

Inputs

Speakers

Network

General

Save

ZONE3

CBL/SAT

0You can use the “Save” and “Load” functions to store or recall various function

settings using web control from a PC.

0To memorize settings, click “Save” on the Setup Menu screen.

0To call up settings, click “Load” on the Setup Menu screen.

0We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

Internet Explorer 10 and above

Mozilla Firefox 24 and above

Google Chrome 29 and above

Safari 5.x and above

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

163

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Panel lock function

To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of

the buttons on the front panel.

Xui ENTER

BACK

Disabling all key button operations

1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER

with the unit in standby mode.

2Use u i to select “P/V LOCK On”.

3Press ENTER to enter the setting.

All button operations except X are disabled.

Disabling all button operations except

VOLUME

1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER

with the unit in standby mode.

2Use u i to select “FP LOCK On”.

3Press ENTER to enter the setting.

All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

164

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Canceling the Panel lock function

1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER

with the unit in standby mode.

2Use u i to select “FP LOCK zOff”.

(z The currently set mode.)

3Press ENTER to enter the setting.

The Panel lock function is canceled.

Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote

control unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

165

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote lock function

When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When

the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote

control unit.

By default, this function is disabled.

Xui ENTER

BACK

Disabling the sensor function of the

remote control unit

1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER

with the unit in standby mode.

2Use u i to select “RC LOCK On”.

3Press ENTER to enter the setting.

Enabling the remote sensor function

1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER

with the unit in standby mode.

2Use u i to select “RC LOCK zOff”.

(z The currently set mode.)

3Press ENTER to enter the setting.

Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

166

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Switches light illumination on/off

Light illumination

DIMMER

You can switch the light illumination around the main display on or off.

The default setting is “On”.

1Press and hold DIMMER on the main unit for 3

seconds.

0Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings

again.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

167

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)

You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).

You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN

ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Connecting ZONE

You can use the following two methods to play back video and audio in

ZONE2 and ZONE3.

0Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (v p. 168)

0Connection through the video output connector and external power

amplifiers (v p. 169)

oConnection 1 : Connection through the HDMI

ZONE2 connector

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can

play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 –

7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

HDMI

ZONE2 HDMI

ZONE2

MAIN ZONE

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE

and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed

down to 2-channel audio.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

168

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oConnection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers

The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

BPR

IN IN

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

BPR

AUX IN AUX IN

MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3

This unit

Power amplifier Power amplifier

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

169

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.

0If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set “HDMI Audio” to “PCM”. (v p. 254) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device

connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2.

In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on

the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.

0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.

0When “Analog Video Out” in the menu is set to “ZONE3”, the component video and video output connector outputs the ZONE3 video. (v p. 205)

0The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

170

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3

VOLUME df

POWER X

MUTE :

ZONE SELECT

Input source

select buttons

1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.

2Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.

The multi zone power indicator on the display lights.

0Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing

ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

3Press the input source select button to select the input

source to be played.

The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or

ZONE3.

0To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE

SELECT. Each time you press ZONE SELECT, the input source

changes.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

171

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdjusting the volume

Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.

0At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.

(v p. 255)

Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the

volume.

oTurning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

Press MUTE :.

The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu.

(v p. 256)

0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :

again.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

172

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Menu map

When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.

The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

Audio

Subwoofer Level Adjust This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer. 179

Bass Sync Adjusts the phase shift when there is a delay in the bass (LFE) recorded on a disc. 179

Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 180

M-DAX Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as

MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.

186

Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 187

Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 187

Audyssey Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®,

Audyssey LFCTM and Audyssey DSX®.

188

Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 192

Video

Picture Adjust Adjusts picture quality. 194

HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output. 196

Output Settings Makes settings for video output. 201

Analog Video Out Assigns the zone that uses the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT connectors.

205

On Screen Display Configures the on-screen display settings. 206

TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 207

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Settings

173

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

Inputs

Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 208

Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 210

Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 210

Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 210

Input Select Sets the audio input mode and decode mode. 211

Speakers

Audyssey® Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are

measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.

212

Manual Setup Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey® Setup settings. 223

Network

Information Displays network information. 247

Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 247

Settings Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server. 250

IP Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 251

Friendly Name The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change

the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

252

Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 252

Maintenance Mode Used when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.

This mode is not designed for use by the end user, and should only be used by a trained

service technician or custom installation professional.

253

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

174

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

General

Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 254

ZONE2 Setup/

ZONE3 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 254

Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 256

Smart Select Names Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer. 256

Trigger Out 1/

Trigger Out 2

Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 257

Auto Standby Configures the Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 257

Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 258

Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 258

Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz. 260

Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the

firmware, and sets up the notification message display.

261

Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 263

Setup Assistant

Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the

guidance indicated on the TV screen.

Page 9 of

the separate

manual

“Quick Start

Guide”

Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.

Speaker Setup

Speaker Calibration

Network Setup

Input Setup

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

175

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

uio p

ENTER SETUP

BACK

ZONE SELECT

Menu operations

1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”.

2Press SETUP.

The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,

then press ENTER.

4Use o p to change to desired setting.

5Press ENTER to enter the setting.

0To return to the previous item, press BACK.

0Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The

menu display disappears.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

176

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputting characters

On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.

0Preset Name (v p. 109)

0Text Search (v p. 131)

0Source Rename (v p. 210)

0Friendly Name (v p. 252)

0Zone Rename (v p. 256)

0Smart Select Names (v p. 256)

0Character input for the network functions

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

177

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using the keyboard screen

1Display the screen for inputting characters.

GExampleH “Source Rename” screen

Inputs/Source Rename

Changes the display name for this source

CBL/SAT

‘

(

)

;

“

CBL/SAT

Clear

Insert

Delete

a/A

Space

Cancel

O K

2Use uio p to select , or ..

3Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that

you wish to change.

0Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one

character.

4Select a character to be input with uio p then press

ENTER.

5Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name.

6Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

178

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio

Make audio-related settings.

Subwoofer Level Adjust

This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.

oSubwoofer Level Adjust

Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.

On: Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer

level.

Off

(Default):

Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer

level.

oSubwoofer 1 Level /Subwoofer 2 Level

These settings adjust the volume level for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer

–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Bass Sync

For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the

recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed.

This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).

0 ms – 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this

to the desired value.

0“Bass Sync” settings are stored for each input source.

0This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.

0This cannot be set when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

0This cannot be set when the input mode is “7.1CH IN”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

179

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Surround Parameter

You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your

preferences.

The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being

input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable

parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 312).

0Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings

during playback.

0“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.

oCinema EQ

Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce

possible harshness and improve clarity.

On: “Cinema EQ” is used.

Off

(Default):“Cinema EQ” is not used.

oLoudness Management

This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or

output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio

recorded in the disc.

(Default):

Outputs are given based on enabling the

settings made in “Dynamic Compression”

and “Dialog normalization function”

(v p. 258).

Off:

“Dynamic Compression” settings and

“Dialogue Normalization” are disabled,

and the signals on the disc are output as

is.

“Loudness Management” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,

Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

180

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic Compression

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto: Automatic dynamic range compression

on/off control according to source.

Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.

Off: Dynamic range compression is always off.

0“Dynamic Compression” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,

Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is input.

0The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or

Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.

0This can be set when “Loudness Management” is set to “On”.

oLow Frequency Effects

Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).

nWhen “Input Mode” is set other than to “7.1CH IN”

-10 dB – 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)

nWhen “Input Mode” is set to “7.1CH IN”

0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +10 dB)

For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the

values below.

0Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB

0DTS movie sources : 0 dB

0DTS music sources: -10 dB

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

181

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

oDialog Control

Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these

can be heard more easily.

0 – 6 (Default : 0)

This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control

function is input.

Update (DTS:X)

oDTS Neural:X

DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and

optimizes them for your speaker configuration.

(Default):Use “DTS Neural:X”.

Off: Do not use “DTS Neural:X”.

This can be set when the surround mode is set to “DTS:X” or “DTS:X MSTR”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

182

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oAuro-Matic 3D Preset

Selects the Auro-Matic 3D Preset for fine tuning the Auro-3D

experience to specific audio material.

Small: Small is ideal for pop and chamber music or movies

with a lot of dialog. (e.g. comedy)

Medium

(Default):

Medium is best used on jazz music or typical

movies and TV shows.

Large:

Large is ideal for recordings that were recorded in

large spaces. (e.g. orchestral recordings or action

movies with big explosions.)

Speech:

Speech is ideal for recordings which are mostly

dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and that have virtually

no inherent spatial information.

0You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.

0This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a

Height channel.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oAuro-Matic 3D Strength

Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original

input signal.

The value ranges from 1(no up-mixing) to 16(Maximum level, providing

maximum effect).

1 - 16 (Default:10)

0You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.

0This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a

Height channel.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

183

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCenter Gain

Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left

and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.

0.0 – 1.0

0You can set this when the sound mode is set to DTS Neo:X.

0The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center

channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and

right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.

oCenter Spread

Center spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front

speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is

optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.

On: Use “Center Spread”.

Off

(Default):Do no use “Center Spread”.

You can set this when sound mode is Dolby Surround.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

184

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSpeaker Select

Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.

nWhen the sound mode is “DTS Neo:X”

Surround Back: Sound is output from the surround back speakers.

Height: Sound is output from the front height speakers.

Wide: Sound is output from the front wide speakers.

Back/Height: Sound is output from the surround back and front

height speakers.

Back/Wide: Sound is output from the surround back and front

wide speakers.

Height/Wide: Sound is output from the front height and front wide

speakers.

This can be selected when using any of the surround back, front wide or front

height speakers.

nWhen the sound mode is the original sound mode

Floor

(Default):Plays back without height speakers.

Floor & Height: Plays back with height speakers.

Front: Plays back only with speakers in front of the

surround speaker.

oSubwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

(Default):The subwoofer is used.

Off: The subwoofer is not used.

You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu

“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)

oSet Defaults

The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

185

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

M-DAX

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)

and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal

components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “M-DAX”

function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the

sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.

It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded

tonal range.

oMode

High: Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak

highs (64 kbps and under).

Medium: Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed

sources (96 kbps and under).

Low: Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs

(96 kbps and over).

Off: Do no use “M-DAX”.

0The M-DAX indicator lights.

0This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =

44.1/48 kHz) is input.

0This item default setting for “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” and “Bluetooth” is

“Low”. All others are set to “Off”.

0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

0“M-DAX” settings are stored for each input source.

0This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.

0This can be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

186

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio Delay

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

0 ms – 200 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or

“Game”. (v p. 201)

0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

0“Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.

Volume

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

oScale

Set how volume is displayed.

0 - 98

(Default):Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.

–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB: Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB

to 18.0 dB.

“Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.

oLimit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)

Off (Default)

oPower On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last

(Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last

session.

Mute: Always use the muting on condition when

power is turned on.

1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

oMute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full

(Default):The sound is muted entirely.

–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

187

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey

Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey

Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™. These can be selected after

Audyssey® Setup has been performed.

For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see

“Explanation of terms” (v p. 321).

0“MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level Offset”, “Dynamic Volume”,

“Audyssey LFC™”, “Containment Amount” and “Audyssey DSX®” settings are

stored for each input source.

0When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ® XT32”,

“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings cannot be configured.

0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

oMultEQ® XT32

MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency

characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup

measurement results. Selection is done from three types of

compensation curves. It is recommended that “Reference” is selected.

Reference

(Default):

Selects the default calibrated setting with

a slight roll off at high frequencies, which

is optimized for movies.

L/R Bypass:

Selects the reference setting, but

bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left

and right speakers.

Flat:

Selects the calibrated setting which is

optimized for small rooms where your

listening position is closer to the

speakers.

Off : Turn “MultEQ® XT32” equalizer off.

When the headphones are used, “MultEQ® XT32” is automatically set to “Off”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

188

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic EQ

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is

decreased by taking into account human perception and room

acoustics.

Works with MultEQ® XT32.

(Default):Use Dynamic EQ.

Off: Do not use Dynamic EQ.

0When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone

Control” adjustment. (v p. 135)

0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC EQ on the main unit.

oReference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It

makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround

envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,

film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film

content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets

from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be

selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.

Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.

0 dB (Film Reference)

(Default):

Optimized for content such as

movies.

5 dB :

Select this setting for content that has

a very wide dynamic range, such as

classical music.

10 dB :

Select this setting for jazz or other

music that has a wider dynamic

range. This setting should also be

selected for TV content as that is

usually mixed at 10 dB below film

reference.

15 dB :

Select this setting for pop/rock music

or other program material that is

mixed at very high listening levels

and has a compressed dynamic

range.

Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 189)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

189

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic Volume

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,

movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud

passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred

volume setting.

Heavy: Most adjustment to softest and loudest

sounds.

Medium: Medium adjustment to loudest and

softest sound.

Light: Least adjustment to loudest and softest

sounds.

Off

(Default):Do not use Dynamic Volume.

0If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup”, the setting is

automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 212)

0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main unit.

oAudyssey LFC™

Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from

being conveyed to neighboring rooms.

On: Use “Audyssey LFC™”.

Off

(Default):Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.

oContainment Amount

Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings

if you have close neighbors.

1 – 7 (Default : 4)

This can be set when “Audyssey LFC™” in the menu is set to “On”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

190

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAudyssey DSX®

Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new

channels.

Wide: Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide

channel expansion.

Height: Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front height

channel expansion.

Wides/Heights: Turns on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide

and front height channel expansion.

Off

(Default):Do not set “Audyssey DSX®”.

0“Audyssey DSX®” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front

wide speakers.

0“Audyssey DSX®” is only valid when using a center speaker.

0When 2-channel signals are being played back, “Audyssey DSX®” cannot be

used.

0“Audyssey DSX®” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played

includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective

channels are played back using the input signals.

0This can be set by pressing A-DSX on the main unit.

oStage Width

Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.

–10 – +10 (Default : 0)

oStage Height

Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.

–10 – +10 (Default : 0)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

191

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Graphic EQ

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

0Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode.

0This can be set when the “MultEQ® XT32” is set to “Off”. (v p. 188)

0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

oGraphic EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.

On: Use the graphic equalizer.

Off

(Default):Do not use the graphic equalizer.

oSpeaker Selection

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all

speakers.

All: Adjust all speaker tones together.

Left/Right

(Default):

Adjust the left and right speaker tones

together.

Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.

oAdjust EQ

Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker

selected in “Speaker Selection”.

1. Select the speaker.

2. Select the adjustment frequency band.

63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /

16 kHz

3. Adjust the level.

–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63

Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

192

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCurve Copy

Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey® Setup.

“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.

oSet Defaults

The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

193

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video

Make video-related settings.

Picture Adjust

Picture quality can be adjusted.

0Can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting is “On”. (v p. 202)

0Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input source.

(v p. 209)

0“Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Noise Reduction” and “Enhancer” can be

set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”.

0“Picture Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.

0“Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.

oPicture Mode

Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and

your viewing environment.

Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room viewing

environments.

Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such

as a theater room.

Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.

brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room

during the day.

ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at

night.

Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.

Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

194

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by

a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation

conditions.

We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-

certified technician.

0These settings can also be configured using “Picture Mode” in the option

menu. (v p. 137)

0The default settings are as follows.

0For “Online Music” and “iPod/USB” input sources: Streaming

0For input sources other than “Online Music” and “iPod/USB”: Off

oContrast

Adjust picture contrast.

-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

oBrightness

Adjust picture brightness.

-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

oSaturation

Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).

-50 – +50 (Default : 0)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

195

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNoise Reduction

Reduce overall video noise.

Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

oEnhancer

Emphasize picture sharpness.

0 – +12 (Default : 0)

HDMI Setup

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

NOTE

When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more

standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is

recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

oAuto Lip Sync

Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video

output.

(Default):Correct automatically.

Off: Do not correct automatically.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

196

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.

AVP

(Default):

Play back through speakers connected to

power amp. (Audio is output from the

PRE OUT connector on this unit.)

TV: Play back through TV connected to the

unit.

0When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio

setting. (“HDMI control function” (v p. 156))

0When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is

output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

oVideo Output

Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.

Auto(Dual)

(Default):

The presence of a TV connected to the

HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2

connector is detected automatically, and

that TV connection is used.

Monitor 1: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR

1 connector is always used.

Monitor 2: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR

2 connector is always used.

0If both the HDMI MONITOR1 and HDMI MONITOR2 connectors are

connected and “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a

resolution that is compatible with both TVs. When “Resolution” is not set to

“Auto”, video may not be output. In this case, set a resolution that is

compatible with both TVs. (v p. 203)

You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in “HDMI

Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2”. (v p. 259)

0This can be set by pressing HDMI OUT on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

197

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVertical Stretch

Sets whether video signals are vertically stretched or not.

On: Stretches video signals vertically.

Off

(Default) : Does not stretch video signals vertically.

NOTE

“Vertical Stretch” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.

(v p. 202)

oHDMI Pass Through

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in

standby power mode.

On:

Transmits the selected HDMI input

through the AV receiver’s HDMI output

when this unit is in standby power mode.

Off

(Default):

No HDMI signals are transmitted through

this unit’s HDMI output in standby power

mode.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

198

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and

compatible with HDMI Control.

On: Use HDMI control function.

Off

(Default):Do not use HDMI control function.

0Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check

the settings.

0Refer to “HDMI control function” for more information about the HDMI control

function. (v p. 156)

NOTE

If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to

connected devices after the change.

oPass Through Source

Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.

Last

(Default):

The most recently used input source will

go into standby mode.

CBL/SAT / DVD /

Blu-ray / Game /

AUX1 / AUX2 /

Media Player / CDz:

Pass through the selected input source.

z“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI

connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input

Assign” setting. (v p. 208)

“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI

Pass Through” is set to “On”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

199

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oTV Audio Switching

Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected

via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVP.

(Default):

Select the “TV Audio” input automatically

when receiving a command from the TV.

Off:

Do not select the “TV Audio” input

automatically when receiving a command

from the TV.

“TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

oPower Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All

(Default):

If power to a connected TV is turned off

independently of the input source, power

to this unit is automatically set to standby.

Video:

With an input source being selected that

is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or

“VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the

TV off, power to this unit is automatically

set to standby. (v p. 209)

Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.

“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

200

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

0Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (v p. 209) is assigned for each

input source.

0“Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler”

is set to anything other than “Off”.

0“Output Settings” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.

0“Video Conversion”, “i/p Scaler”, “Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect

Ratio” settings are stored for each input source.

oVideo Mode

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video

content.

Auto

(Default):

Process video automatically based on

the HDMI content information.

Game:

Always process video for game content.

Minimize the video delay when the video

is delayed compared to the button

operations on the controller of the game

console.

Movie: Perform image processing that is suitable

for contents other than games.

If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input

contents.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

201

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo Conversion

The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with

the connected TV. (“Video conversion function” (v p. 303))

(Default):The input video signal is converted.

Off: The input video signal is not converted.

oi/p Scaler

Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p scaler processing.

i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the

value set in “Resolution”. (v p. 203)

nWhen the input source is set other than to “iPod/

USB” and “Online Music”

Analog

(Default):

Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler

function for analog video signals.

Analog & HDMI: Use i/p scaler function for analog and

HDMI video signal.

HDMI: Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video

signals.

Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

202

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nWhen the input source is set to “iPod/USB” and

“Online Music”

(Default):Use i/p scaler function.

Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.

0“Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input

connector is assigned.

0Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input

connector.

0This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D, sYCC601

color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.

oResolution

Set the output resolution. You can set “Resolution” separately for

HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.

Auto

(Default):

The resolution supported by the TV

connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT

connector is detected automatically and

the appropriate output resolution is set.

480p/576p / 1080i /

720p / 1080p /

1080p:24Hz /

4K / 4K(60/50) :

Set the output resolution.

0When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog

video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 202)

0When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in

24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the

resolution to “1080p”.

0It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a

resolution of 1080p/50Hz.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

203

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oProgressive Mode

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video

signal.

Auto

(Default):

The video signal is automatically

detected and the appropriate mode is

set.

Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.

Video and Film: Select mode suitable for video and 30-

frame film material playback.

This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.

(v p. 202)

oAspect Ratio

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.

16:9

(Default):Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.

4:3 :

Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars

on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except

for 480p/576p output)

This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.

(v p. 202)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

204

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Analog Video Out

Assigns the zone that uses the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT connectors.

oZONE

MAIN ZONE (Default) :

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT and the VIDEO MONITOR

OUT connector to MAIN ZONE.

ZONE3 :

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT and the VIDEO MONITOR

OUT connector to ZONE3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

205

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

On Screen Display

Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

oVolume

Sets where to display the volume level.

Bottom

(Default):Display at the bottom.

Top: Display at the top.

Off: Turn display off.

When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed

captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.

oInfo

Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is

changed, or input source is switched.

(Default):Shows the volume display.

Off: Does not show the volume display.

oNow Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is

“Online Music”, “iPod/USB”, “Bluetooth” or “Tuner”.

Always On

(Default):Show display continuously.

Auto Off: Show display for 30 seconds after

operation.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

206

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV Format

Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

oFormat

PAL

(Default):Select PAL output.

NTSC: Select NTSC output.

“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen

is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.

1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same time

for at least 3 seconds.

“Video Format <PAL>” appears on the display.

2. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the video signal format.

3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

NOTE

When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture

will not be displayed properly.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

207

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputs

Perform settings related to input source playback.

You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign

By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the

audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the

input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a

connected device.

Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio

input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input

connector and video input connector when connecting an input source

that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this

unit.

DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI COMP VIDEO

Inputs/Input Assign

Set Defaults

CBL/SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

Game

Media Player

TV Audio

AUX1

AUX2

Front

COAX1

COAX2

OPT1

Changes HDMI input assignments

CD - 5 - -

OPT2

By default, each item is set as follows.

Input source Input connector

HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP VIDEO

CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 1 1

DVD 2 COAX2 2 2 2

Blu-ray 3 – 3 3 3

Game 4 – 4 – 4

Media Player 5 – 6 – –

TV Audio – OPT1 – – –

AUX1 Front – Front – Front

AUX2 6 – – – –

CD – OPT2 5 – –

nTV set top box/satellite users please note

When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:

To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio

signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to

select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 211)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

208

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input

sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 /

7 / Front:

Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected

input source.

– : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the

selected input source.

When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be assigned to

“TV Audio”. (v p. 199)

oDIGITAL

Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the

input sources.

COAX1 (Coaxial) /

COAX2 /

OPT1 (Optical) /

OPT2:

Assign a digital audio input connector to the

selected input source.

– : Do not assign a digital audio input connector

to the selected input source.

oANALOG

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the

input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 /

Front / XLR:

Assign a analog audio input connector to

the selected input source.

– : Do not assign a analog audio input

connector to the selected input source.

oCOMP (Component video)

Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to

the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3: Assign the component video input connector to the

selected input source.

– : Do not assign a component video input connector to the

selected input source.

oVIDEO

Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to

the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /

Front:

Assign the video input connector to the selected

input source.

– : Do not assign a video input connector to the

selected input source.

oSet Defaults

The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

209

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Source Rename

Change the display name for input source.

This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source

name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your

needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this

unit’s display and on the menu screen.

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game /

AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CD /

TV Audio / Phono:

Change the display name for input

source.

Set Defaults: The Source Rename settings are

returned to the default settings.

Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see “Using the keyboard

screen” (v p. 178).

Hide Sources

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

Show

(Default):Use this source.

Hide: Do not use this source.

Source Level

This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s

audio input.

Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels

between the different sources.

oSource Level

nWhen the input source is set to “iPod/USB”,

“Online Music”, “Bluetooth” or “Tuner”

-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

oAnalog Inputs / Digital Inputs

nWhen the input source is set other than to “iPod/

USB”, “Online Music”, “Bluetooth” or “Tuner”

-12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)

0The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which

“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 208)

0The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which

“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 208)

0“Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

210

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input Select

Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.

The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input

source.

“Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.

oInput Mode

Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.

It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.

Auto

(Default):

Automatically detect input signal and

perform playback.

HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.

Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input.

Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input.

7.1CH IN: Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN

connector will be played back.

0When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.

If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.

(v p. 208)

0If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is

connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input

source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.

0The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

oDecode Mode

Set the audio decode mode for input source.

It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”. But

we recommend changing it to “PCM” or “DTS” if the start of the source

is clipped or noise occurs.

Auto

(Default):

Detect type of digital audio input signal

and decode and play automatically.

PCM: Decode and play only PCM input signals.

DTS: Decode and play only DTS input signals.

This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is assigned

at “Input Assign” (v p. 208).

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Auro-3D: The input signal is decoded using an

Auro-3D decoder.

0This item can always be set on models supporting Auro-3D.

0The sound modes you can select are Auro-3D or Auro-2D Surround when the

“Decode Mode” setting is “Auro-3D”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

211

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speakers

The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called

“Audyssey® Setup”.

You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.

To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 235)

Audyssey® Setup

To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in

multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we

recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the

illustration (up to eight positions).

When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound

calibration microphone within 60 cm of the first measurement position

(main listening position).

If you perform the Audyssey® setup, the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey

Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ functions are

enabled. (v p. 188 - 190)

FL SW C FR

SRSL

Surround speaker (R)

Surround speaker (L)

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Front speaker (R)

Front speaker (L)

( :Measuring positions)

Listening position

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

212

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAbout the main listening position

The main listening position is the position where listeners would

normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening

environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound

calibration microphone in the main listening position.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to

calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover

value for the subwoofer.

oAbout Audyssey Sub EQ HT™

Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers

seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences

between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ®

XT32 to both subwoofers together.

To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in

“Channel Select”. (v p. 215).

NOTE

0Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room

measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices

(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be

affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.

0During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.

Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.

0Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow

obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the

Sound calibration microphone at least 50 cm away from the wall. Failure to do so

will result in inaccurate readings.

0During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers

and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise

in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.

0Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit

during the measurements will cancel the measurements.

0Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the

headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

213

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Procedure for speaker settings

(Audyssey® Setup)

Finish

Check

Calculation & Store

Measurement

Preparation

1Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the

supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it

at the main listening position.

When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of

the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the

height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.

2If using a subwoofer capable of the following

adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.

nWhen using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment

and crossover frequency setting.

nWhen using a subwoofer without a direct mode

Make the following settings:

0Volume : 12 o’clock position

0Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency

0Low pass filter : Off

0Standby mode : Off

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

214

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

3Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

When the Sound calibration microphone is

connected, the following screen is displayed.

Audyssey Setup

Channel Select

Amp Assign

Check Results

Restore...

Start

Your AV preamp can automatically measure the acoustics of

your room then optimize your speakers using the included

microphone and microphone stand.

Set the following items

if necessary.

4Select “Start”, then press ENTER.

Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.

0Amp Assign

The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, HEIGHT1 and

HEIGHT2 PRE OUT connectors can be switched in accordance

with your speaker environment. (Amp Assign (v p. 223))

0Channel Select

If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,

measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring

time can be reduced. You can also change the number of

surround back speakers and subwoofer.

5Follow the instructions on the screen display and press

“Next” to proceed further.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

215

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

6When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin

Test” and then press ENTER.

Start the measurement of the first position.

Begin Test

Back

Select “Begin Test” to start the calibration.

NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping

during the tests.

Ear Height

Audyssey Setup

0Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE

If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:

0Go to “Error messages” (v p. 220). Check any related items, and

perform the necessary procedures.

0If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is

displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”

(v p. 221).

7When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”

and then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup

Repeat Last Test Next

Speaker Detection

Front

Center

Subwoofer

Surround

Surr. Back

Front Wide

Front Height

:Yes

:1 spkr

:Yes

:No

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

216

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

8Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,

select “Continue”, then press ENTER.

The measurement of the second position starts.

Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

Complete Continue

Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position,

which should be no more than 60cm away from the 1st

position, then select “Continue”...

Back

Ear Height

Audyssey Setup

To skip measuring the second and subsequent listening position, press o to

select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.

nStopping Audyssey® Setup

APress BACK to display the popup screen.

BPress o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

9Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.

Select “Continue”, then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup

Continue

Repeat Last Test

Measurements complete.

Select Continue to analyze the data...

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.

0Analysis takes several minutes to complete.

The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,

the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE

When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not

turned off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

217

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®.

The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the

settings as preferred.

Audyssey Setup

Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround

sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies

and television.

Turn on the Dynamic EQ?

Yes

Analyzing room data

50%

0Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of

the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so

that sound can be heard even at low volume.

This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned

down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of

the night.

0Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level

while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.

Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any

loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,

the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during

television programs.

When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound

calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the

main unit and then press “Next”.

Audyssey Setup

Now Analyzing and correcting your room data.

Please disconnect the microphone from your AV preamp.

Back

Applying room corrections

100%

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

218

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the

measurement results.

0Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the

actual distance due to added electrical delay common in

subwoofers.

NOTE

Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey® Setup.

If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum

equalizer settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

219

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Error messages

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error

message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples Error details Measures

No speakers found. 0Sound calibration microphone is not

detected.

0Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

0Not all speakers could be detected. 0Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high or level is too

low

0There is too much noise in the room. 0Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.

0Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.

0Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low. 0Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the

speakers are facing.

0Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.

Front R : None 0The displayed speaker could not be

detected.

0Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Front R : Phase 0The displayed speaker is connected with the

polarity reversed.

0Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.

0For some speakers, this error message may be displayed

even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the

connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press

ENTER.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

220

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSubwoofer level error message and how to

adjust

The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup

measurement is 75 dB.

During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed

when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the

subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB

range.

G Error message H

Audyssey Setup

Back SW Level MatchingSkip

Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.

If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,

select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of

your subwoofer.

If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,

or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.

1Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.

2Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that

the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.

3When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB

range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.

0If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment

will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

221

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup

measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even

when you have changed each setting manually.

Audyssey Setup

Channel Select

Amp Assign

Check Results

Restore...

Start

Your AV preamp can automatically measure the acoustics of

your room then optimize your speakers using the included

microphone and microphone stand.

Set the following items

if necessary.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

222

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Manual Setup

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings

made in Audyssey® Setup.

0If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup,

you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey

Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 188 - 190)

0This unit can be used without changing “Manual Setup” settings. Please

set if necessary.

Amp Assign

You can change the Pre Amplifier assignment according to your speaker

system.

oAssign Mode

Select how to use the Pre Amplifier.

You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker

configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign

Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.

11.1ch

(Default):

All Pre Amplifiers for this unit are used for MAIN ZONE.

Up to 13.1-channels can be connected for MAIN ZONE.

The speakers play back up to 11.1-channels in

accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

(v p. 224)

9.1ch (Bi-

Amp):

0The Pre Amplifier of this unit is assigned to 2-channels

for creating bi-amp connections with the front speaker.

Up to 11.1-channels can be connected for MAIN ZONE.

The speakers play back up to 9.1-channels in

accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

(v p. 227)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

223

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

9.1ch +

Front B:

0The Pre Amplifier of this unit is assigned to 2 channels

for connecting to the second front speaker.

0You can switch between the desired combination of

front speakers A and front speakers B. (v p. 230)

Switch the front speaker using the “Front Speaker”

setting. (v p. 230)

Dolby

Atmos :

0Setting to assign the Pre amplifiers within this unit for

the speaker layout suitable for Dolby Atmos playback.

(v p. 233)

When using the front height, rear height or Dolby Atmos

Enabled speakers for Dolby Atmos playback, set “Assign

Mode” to either “11.1ch” or “9.1ch”.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Auro-3D:

0Setting to assign the power amplifiers with this unit

for the speaker layout suitable for Auro-3D playback.

(v p. 234)

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height

speakers are recommended, however you may

substitute rear height speakers in place of surround

height speakers.

When using the rear height speakers, set “Assign

Mode” to “9.1ch” or “11.1ch”.

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to

“11.1ch”

When “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, set the following items.

nHeight Speakers

Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

2 Height Speakers

(Default):Uses a set of (two) height speakers.

4 Height Speakers : Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.

Using Dolby Speakers : Select when the Dolby Atmos Enabled

speakers are connected.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

5 Height Speakers: Uses five height speakers z

zIf “5 Height Speakers” is selected, connect the Top Surround speaker to the

Subwoofer 2 terminal.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

224

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nLayout

Select the type of the height speakers used.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channel used.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1

Front Height　

(Default) Front Height

Top Front Top Front

Top Middle Top Middle

Top Rear Top Rear

Rear Height Rear Height

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle

Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height

Top Front & Top Rear

(Default) Top Front Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

225

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surround Height

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height z

zFor the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “5 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channel used.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 SUBWOOFER2

Front Height & Surr.

Height

Front

Height

Surround

Height Top Surround

Front Height & Rear

Height

Front

Height

Rear

Height zTop Surround

zFor the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Dolby

(Default) Front Dolby Not assigned.

Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.

Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.

Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height

Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby

Front Height & Back Dolby Front Height Back Dolby

Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby

Top Front & Back Dolby Top Front Back Dolby

Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby

Front Dolby & Back Dolby Front Dolby Back Dolby

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

226

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to

“9.1ch (Bi-Amp)”

When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch (Bi-Amp)”, set the following items.

nPre-out for Bi-Amp

Select the PRE OUT connectors used for the bi-amp connection of

front speakers.

FRONT WIDE

(Default):

Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT

PRE OUT connectors and FRONT WIDE PRE

OUT connectors.

HEIGHT1:

Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT

PRE OUT connectors and HEIGHT1 PRE OUT

connectors.

SURROUND

BACK:

Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT

PRE OUT connectors and SURROUND BACK

PRE OUT connectors.

nHeight Speakers

Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None: Uses no height speakers.

2 Height Speakers

(Default):Uses a set of (two) height speakers.

4 Height Speakers: Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.

Using Dolby Speakers: Select when the Dolby Atmos Enabled

speakers are connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

227

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nLayout

Select the type of the height speakers used.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channel used.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1

Front Height　

(Default) Front Height

Top Front Top Front

Top Middle Top Middle

Top Rear Top Rear

Rear Height Rear Height

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle

Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height

Top Front & Top Rear

(Default) Top Front Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

228

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surround Height

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height z

zFor the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Dolby

(Default) Front Dolby Not assigned.

Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.

Back Dolby zBack Dolby Not assigned.

Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height

Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby

Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby

Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby

zWhen “Pre-out for Bi-Amp” setting is “FRONT WIDE”, you can make this

setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

229

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to

“9.1ch + Front B”

When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch + Front B”, set the following

items.

nPre-out for Front B

Select the PRE OUT connectors used for the front speakers of the

second unit.

FRONT WIDE

(Default):

Connect the front speakers of the second unit to

the FRONT WIDE PRE OUT connectors.

HEIGHT1: Connect the front speakers of the second unit to

the HEIGHT1 PRE OUT connectors.

SURROUND

BACK:

Connect the front speakers of the second unit to

the SURROUND BACK PRE OUT connectors.

nHeight Speakers

Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None: Uses no height speakers.

2 Height Speakers

(Default):Uses a set of (two) height speakers.

4 Height Speakers: Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.

Using Dolby Speakers: Select when the Dolby Atmos Enabled

speakers are connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

230

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nLayout

Select the type of the height speakers used.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channel used.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1

Front Height　

(Default) Front Height

Top Front Top Front

Top Middle Top Middle

Top Rear Top Rear

Rear Height Rear Height

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle

Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height

Top Front & Top Rear

(Default) Top Front Top Rear

Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

231

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surround Height

Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height z

zFor the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H

Select the height channels used for the two pair.

AUDIO OUT connectors

Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

Front Dolby

(Default) Front Dolby Not assigned.

Surround Dolby zSurround Dolby Not assigned.

Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.

Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height

Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby

Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby

Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby

zWhen “Pre-out for Front B” setting is “"FRONT WIDE"”, you can make this

setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

232

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to

“Dolby Atmos”

When “Assign Mode” is set to “Dolby Atmos”, set the following items.

nLayout

Select the speaker layout for Dolby Atmos playback.

7.1ch + 4 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top front and

top rear speakers to the 7.1 channel layout

which includes the surround back channel.

Connect the top front speakers to the

HEIGHT1 PRE OUT connectors and the top

rear speakers to the HEIGHT2

UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connectors

or FRONT WIDE/HIGHT2 BALANCED XLR

PRE OUT connectors.

7.1ch + 2 Height

(Default):

This is a layout that adds the top middle

speakers to the 7.1 channel layout including

the surround back channel. Connect the top

middle speakers to the HEIGHT1 PRE OUT

connectors.

5.1ch + 4 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top front and

top rear speakers to the basic 5.1 channel

layout. Connect the top front speakers to the

HEIGHT1 PRE OUT connectors and the top

rear speakers to the HEIGHT2

UNBALANCED RCA PRE OUT connectors

or FRONT WIDE/HIGHT2 BALANCED XLR

PRE OUT connectors.

5.1ch + 2 Height:

This is a layout that adds the top middle

speakers to the basic 5.1 channel layout.

Connect the top middle speakers to the

HEIGHT1 PRE OUT connectors.

When using the front height, rear height or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers for

Dolby Atmos playback, set “Assign Mode” to either “11.1ch” or “9.1ch”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

233

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oDetailed setting when “Assign Mode” is set to

“Auro-3D”

When “Assign Mode” is set to “Auro-3D”, set the following items.

nLayout

Select the speaker layout for Auro-3D playback

Auro 9.1ch

(Default):

This is a layout that adds the front height and

surround height speakers to the basic 5.1 channel

layout.

Connect the front height speakers to the HEIGHT1

PRE OUT connectors and the surround height

speakers to the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT connectors.

Auro 10.1ch:

This is a layout that adds the front height, surround

height and top surround speakers to the basic 5.1

channel layout.

Connect the front height speakers to the HEIGHT1

PRE OUT connectors and the surround height

speakers to the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT connectors.

And connect the top surround speaker to

SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT connector.

In this setting, you can’t use the second subwoofer.

For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended,

however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height

speakers.

When using the rear height speakers, set “Assign Mode” to “9.1ch” or “11.1ch”.

oView Terminal Config.

This shows how to connect the PRE OUT connectors for your “Amp

Assign” setting on the menu screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

234

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker Config.

Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low

bass frequencies and speaker size.

oFront

Set the front speaker size.

Large

(Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small:

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

0When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.

0When “Front” is set to “Small”, you cannot set speakers other than “Front” to

“Large”.

oCenter

Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when a center speaker is not

connected.

oSubwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

2 spkrs: Use two subwoofers.

1 spkr

(Default):Use only one subwoofer.

None: Select when a subwoofer is not

connected.

When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” and you set “Front” to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is

automatically set to “1 spkr”.

oSurround

Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the surround speakers are

not connected.

When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Wide”, “Surround Dolby”

and “Back Dolby” are automatically set to “None”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

235

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSurr. Back

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the surround back speakers

are not connected.

2 spkrs

(Default):Use two surround back speakers.

1 spkr:

Use only one surround back speaker.

Connect to the L connector to

SURROUND BACK when this setting is

selected.

If “Surr. Back” is “None” or “1 spkr”, “Back Dolby” is automatically “None”.

oFront Wide

Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the front wide speakers are

not connected.

oFront Height

Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the front height speakers are

not connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

236

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oTop Front

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the top front speakers are

not connected.

oTop Middle

Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the top middle speakers are

not connected.

oTop Rear

Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the top rear speakers are

not connected.

oRear Height

Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the rear height speakers are

not connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

237

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFront Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the front Dolby speakers are

not connected.

oSurround Dolby

Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the surround Dolby

speakers are not connected.

oBack Dolby

Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the back Dolby speakers are

not connected.

When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to

“None”, “None” is automatically set for Height2.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

238

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oSurround Height

Set the presence and size of the surround height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the surround height

speakers are not connected.

When “Front Height” is set to “None”, “Surround Height” is automatically set to

“None”.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oTop Surround

Set the presence and size of the top surround speaker.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately

play back very low bass frequencies.

Small

(Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate

playback capacity for very low bass

frequencies.

None: Select when the top surround speaker is

not connected.

When “Surround Height” or “Rear Height” is set to “None”, “Top Surround” is

automatically set to “None”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

239

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Distances

Set distance from listening position to speakers.

Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each

speaker.

oUnit

Set the unit of distance.

Meters (Default)

Feet

oStep

Set the minimum variable width of the distance.

0.1 m (Default) / 0.01 m

1 ft / 0.1 ft

oSet Defaults

The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.

oSet the distance

0.00 m – 18.00 m / 0.0 ft – 60.0 ft

0The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and

“Speaker Config.” settings. (v p. 223, 235)

0Default settings:

Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center /

Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 3.60 m (12.0 ft)

Speakers other than the above: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

0Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m

(20.0 ft).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

240

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Levels

Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position

when it is output from each speaker.

oTest Tone Start

A test tone is output from the selected speaker.

While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the

selected speaker.

–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.

0If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the

settings in “Channel Level Adjust”. (v p. 134)

0When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you

cannot set “Levels”.

oSet Defaults

The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

241

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Crossovers

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies

that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual

for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

oSpeaker Selection

Selects how to set the crossover frequency.

All

(Default):

Sets the same crossover frequency for all

speakers.

Individual: Selects the crossover points for each

speaker individually.

oSet the crossover frequency

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /

200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)

0“Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or

when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 243)

0The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the

widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that

the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to

“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.

0Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the

speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the

subwoofer or front speakers.

0The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on

to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v p. 243)

0When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be

set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the

setting cannot be made. (v p. 235)

0When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the

“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 235)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

242

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Bass

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

oSubwoofer Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE

(Default):

The low range signal of the channel set to

“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE

signal output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main:

The low range signal of all channels is

added to the LFE signal output from the

subwoofer.

0“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the

menu is set to other than “None”. (v p. 235)

0Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.

0If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer

Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,

depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. Select “LFE+Main” if

you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

(v p. 235)

oLPF for LFE

Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the

playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.

80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /

200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 120 Hz)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

243

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Front Speaker

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.

(Default):Front speaker A is used.

B : Front speaker B is used.

A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.

This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch + Front B”. (v p. 223)

2ch Playback

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct

and stereo playback modes.

oSetting

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct

and stereo playback modes.

Auto

(Default):The settings in “Speakers” are applied. (v p. 212)

Manual: Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the

following settings:

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

244

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFront

Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.

Large

(Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back

very low bass frequencies.

Small: Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback

capacity for very low bass frequencies.

When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, “Large” is

automatically set. (v p. 235)

oSubwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Yes

(Default):Use a subwoofer.

No: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, No is

automatically set. (v p. 235) If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is

automatically “Yes”.

oSW Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE

(Default):

When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large”, only

LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also,

when “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the

front channel low range signals are added to the

LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main: The front channel low range signal is added to the

LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

245

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCrossover

Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each

channel to the subwoofer.

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /

200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)

0This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

0When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large” and “SW Mode” is set to LFE,

“Full Band” is displayed and this cannot be set.

oDistance FL/Distance FR

Set distance from main listening position to speaker.

0.0ft – 60.0ft (Default : 12.0ft) /

0.00m – 18.00m (Default : 3.60m)

Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00

m).

oLevel FL/Level FR

Adjust the level of each channel.

-12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

246

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Network

To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.

If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).

When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter

information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information

Display network information.

Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC

Address

MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account.

Connection

Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a

wired LAN.

When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select “Wired

(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable,

When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless (Wi-

Fi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”.

oConnect Using

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).

Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.

Wireless (Wi-Fi): Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect

to a network.

You can disable the Wi-Fi function of this unit by configuring the following

settings.

1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same

time for at least 3 seconds.

“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.

2. Use the main unit’s i to display “zWired LAN <Unlock>”.

3. Use the main unit’s o or p to select “<Lock>”.

4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

247

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wi-Fi Setup

Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.

The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection

method to suit your home environment.

oScan Networks

Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible

networks shown on the TV screen.

1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless

networks.

Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.

2. Enter your password and select “OK”.

oUse iOS Device

Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By

connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically

connected to the same network as your device.

This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a

USB cable and using Wi-Fi.

nWhen connecting using Wi-Fi

1. Select “Wireless connection” on the TV screen.

2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN

(Wi-Fi) router and select “Marantz AV8802” from “SET UP NEW

AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration

screen of your iOS device.

3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.

The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS7 or later.

nWhen using a USB cable

1. Select “USB cable” on the TV screen.

2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN

(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a

USB cable.

3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen.

4. Tap “Allow” when the connection message appears on the

screen of your iOS device.

The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS5 or later.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

248

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWPS Router

Use a WPS-compatible router to connect.

There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the

PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.

nWhen connecting using the push button method

1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.

2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the

router you wish to connect to.

0The time for pressing the button varies depending on the

router.

3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

nWhen connecting using the PIN code method

1. Select “PIN” on the TV screen.

2. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.

oManual

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to

connect to.

1. Set the following items.

SSID: Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).

Security: Select the encryption method according to the

encryption setting of the access point you are using.

Password: Input the password.

Default Key:

Select the Default Key.

When connecting to a “WEP” encrypted network,

“Default Key” menu is displayed.

2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.

The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or

tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.

When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS7 or later, “When connecting

using Wi-Fi” (v p. 248) in “Use iOS Device”.

1. Press and hold the DIMMER and ZONE SELECT buttons on the main unit for at

least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.

2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Marantz AV8802” when the

message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Marantz AV8802””

appears in the display.

3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16” in the URL.

4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

249

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Settings

Configure the proxy settings and IP address.

0If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information

required for network connection such as the IP address will be

automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the

default settings of this unit.

0Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server

information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting

to a network without DHCP function.

0Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to

the Internet.

DHCP

-IP Address

-Subnet Mask

Proxy

Save

Cancel

-Address

-Port

-Default Gateway

-Primary DNS

-Secondary DNS

Configures the network settings manually

Off

000.000.000.000

On(Address)

000.000.000.000

00000

Network/Settings

192.168.001.002

255.255.255.000

192.168.001.001

oDHCP

Selects how to connect to the network.

(Default):

Configure the network settings

automatically from your router.

Off: Configure the network settings manually.

oIP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.

0The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses

are set.

CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254

CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254

CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

oSubnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to

this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation

supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.

oDefault Gateway

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

oPrimary DNS, Secondary DNS

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation

supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more

DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and

“Secondary DNS”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

250

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oProxy

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.

Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a

proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your

provider, etc.

On(Address): Select when inputting by address.

On(Name): Select when inputting by domain name.

Off

(Default):Disables the proxy server.

oPort

Enter port number.

0If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.

(v p. 79)

0If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet

Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

IP Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

Off In Standby

(Default):Suspend network function during standby.

Always On:

Network is on during standby. Main unit

operable with a network compatible

controller.

When using the web control function or Marantz Remote App, use with the “IP

Control” setting set to “Always On”.

NOTE

When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

251

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Friendly Name

The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You

can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

oFriendly Name

Selects Friendly Name from the list.

When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name

according to your preferences.

Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /

Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /

Office / Other

0Up to 63 characters can be input.

For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 178).

0The default Friendly Name on first use is “Marantz AV8802”.

oSet Defaults

Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default

setting.

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

oPhysical Connection

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)” will be

displayed.

oRouter Access

Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

Error: Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router

settings.

oInternet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).

Error: Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection

environment or router settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

252

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Maintenance Mode

Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or

custom installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn’t suitable for use by the end

user, only by a trained service technician or custom installation

professional.

NOTE

Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

253

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

General

Make various other settings.

Language

Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.

English / Deutsch / Français / Italiano / Español / Nederlands /

Svenska / Pусский / Polski

(Default : English)

“Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen

is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.

1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the

same time for at least 3 seconds.

“Video Format <PAL>” appears on the display.

2. Press the main unit’s i.

“GUI Language ENGLISH” appears on the display.

3. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the language.

4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are displayed according to the

setting specified for the volume “Scale”. (v p. 187)

oBass

Adjust bass.

-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)

oTreble

Adjust treble.

-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)

oHigh Pass Filter

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.

On: The low range is attenuated.

Off

(Default):The low range is not attenuated.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

254

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oLch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

oRch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

oChannel

Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.

Stereo

(Default):Stereo playback.

Mono: Monaural playback.

oHDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)

Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.

Through

(Default):

The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the

device in ZONE2.

PCM:

The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a

PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT

connectors.

oVolume Level

Set the volume output level.

Variable

(Default):Volume can be adjusted.

1 – 98

(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):

Volume is fixed at the desired level. The

volume cannot be adjusting using the remote

control unit.

oVolume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)

(Default : 70 (-10 dB))

Off: Do not set a maximum volume.

This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 255)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

255

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oPower On Volume

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last

(Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last

session.

Mute: Always use the muting on condition.

1 – 98

(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB): The volume is adjusted to the set level.

This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 255)

oMute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full

(Default):The sound is muted entirely.

–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3

Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

Up to 10 characters can be input.

For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 178).

Smart Select Names

Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you

prefer.

Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4

Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited smart select

name.

Up to 16 characters can be input.

For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 178).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

256

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2

Select the conditions for activating trigger out.

For details about how to connect the DC OUT jacks, see “DC OUT

jacks” (v p. 83).

nWhen setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 /

ZONE3)

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to

“On”.

nWhen setting for input source

Activates trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.

nWhen setting for HDMI monitor

Activates trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.

On: Activate trigger on this mode.

– – –: Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Auto Standby

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.

oMAIN ZONE

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or

video signals input into this unit.

Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on

the unit display and the menu screen.

60 min:

The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.

30 min:

The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.

15 min

(Default):

The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.

Off: The unit does not go into standby

automatically.

oZONE2 / ZONE3

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,

the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state

after about 8 hours.

4 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby

state after about 4 hours.

2 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby

state after about 2 hours.

Off

(Default):

Does not automatically switch ZONE2/

ZONE3 to the standby state.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

257

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

oDimmer

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Bright

(Default):Normal display brightness.

Dim: Reduced display brightness.

Dark: Very low display brightness.

Off: Turns the display off.

You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

oChannel Indicators

Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for

the channel indication on the display.

Input: Uses the input signal display for the channel

indication on the display.

Output

(Default):

Uses the output signal display for the

channel indication on the display.

Information

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

oAudio

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.

Input Signal: The input signal type.

Format: The number of input signal channels (presence of

front, surround, LFE).

Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.

Offset: The dialogue normalization correction value.

Flag:

This is displayed when inputting signals including a

surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with

DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-

ES Discrete signals.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

258

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo

Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for

MAIN ZONE.

HDMI Signal Info.

Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth

HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2

Interface / Resolutions

oZONE

Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE:

This item shows information about settings for

MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs

according to the input source.

ZONE2: This item shows information about settings for

ZONE2.

ZONE3: This item shows information about settings for

ZONE3.

oFirmware

Version: Displays information for the current firmware.

Update (DTS:X)

DTS Version : Displays the current DTS version.

“DTS Version” is displayed after updating to DTS:X via firmware update.

oNotifications

Displays and sets notifications.

Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is

turned on.

Notification Alerts

(Default):Notification messages are displayed.

Off: Notification messages are not displayed.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

259

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,

sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

AUDYSSEY

SIGNAL

EXT FHRFHL

SB SBRSBL

CFR FWRFLFWL

LFE SRSL

SBRSBL

CFRFL

SW1 SRSL

INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS

SOUND

SOURCE

Dynamic EQ : On

MultEQ XT32 : Reference

Dynamic Volume : Medium

Dolby TrueHD

50.0

Dolby TrueHD

Blu-ray

Usage Data

To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects

anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as

frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).

Marantz will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes: Provide information on the operating status of this unit.

No: Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

260

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades,

updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for

updates and upgrades.

oUpdate

Updates the firmware of this unit.

Check for

Update:

Checks to see if the firmware is the latest version. You

can also check approximately how long it will take to

complete an update.

Update

Start:

Execute the update process. When the update starts,

the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the

progress is shown on the display.

This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If the update still fails,

either one of the following messages will appear on the screen. If the display

reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update

again.

Display Description

Updating fail Updating failed.

Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.

Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.

Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.

oNotifications

When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is

displayed on the TV screen at power on.

The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the

power is turned on.

Update

(Default):Display update message.

Off: Do not display update message.

Upgrade

(Default):Display upgrade message.

Off: Do not display upgrade message.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

261

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdd New Feature

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform

an upgrade.

Upgrade

Package: Display the items to be upgraded.

Upgrade

Status:

Display a list of the additional functions provided by

the upgrade.

Upgrade Start:

Execute the upgrade process.

When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut

down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade

time which has elapsed is displayed.

0See the Marantz website for details about upgrades.

0When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and

upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not

Registered” is displayed.

The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the

procedure.

The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s

o and SETUP for at least 3 seconds.

0If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in

“Firmware” - “Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and

network environment and then perform the upgrade again.

Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”

0In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system

requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 79)

0Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.

0Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure

to be completed.

0Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot

be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,

there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,

etc., set on this unit.

0If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for

more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update

Retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at

which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the

network environment.

Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be

announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

262

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent changes.

oLock

On: Turn protection on.

Off

(Default):Turn protection off.

When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.

NOTE

When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup

Lock”.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

263

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating external devices with the remote control unit

SMART

SELECT

1 – 4

0 – 9

SET

INFO

CH/PAGE d

OPTION

ENTER

AVP

Input source

select buttons

When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it

can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players

or TVs made by different manufacturers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

264

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Registering preset codes

There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for

registering preset codes of Marantz players, the method for registering the

preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices, and the method for

experimenting with preset codes one by one for registration.

●“Registering Marantz Players”(v p. 265)

●“Registering by entering preset numbers”(v p. 266)

oRegistering Marantz Players

Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of

Marantz Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.

nRegistering Blu-ray Disc Players

1Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until “OK”

indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then

release.

nRegistering DVD Players

1Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until “OK”

indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then

release.

nRegistering CD Players

1Press and hold down CD and OPTION until “OK”

indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then

release.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

265

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nRegistering multiple players at the same time

1Press and hold down the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 and

OPTION until “OK” indicator on the remote control

display is flashing, then release.

Devices to be registered at the

same time Press and hold down

the buttons

Blu-ray Disc

player

DVD player CD player

P P SMART SELECT 1 and

OPTION

P P SMART SELECT 2 and

OPTION

P P SMART SELECT 3 and

OPTION

P P P SMART SELECT 4 and

OPTION

NOTE

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may

not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers” (v p. 266).

oRegistering by entering preset numbers

Before starting, confirm the preset number of the device that you want

to register and the buttons that can be registered in the “Preset Code

Table” (v p. 345) in the Appendix.

1Press and hold down the input source select button

that you want to register the preset code to and SET

until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display

is flashing, then release.

2Enter the preset number (4 digits) listed for the device

in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 –

9) on the remote control.

0Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset

codes to change the number and verify correct operation.

0If the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered, use the

learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered for use

by the Marantz remote control included with this device. (v p. 272)

0To unregister the device from a button and reset to the default setting, set the AVP

code “0000” to the button.

NOTE

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may

not operate.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

266

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oExperimenting with preset codes one by one

for registration

1Switch the power on of the device for which you want

to set the preset code.

2Press and hold down the input source select button

that you want to register the preset code to and SET

until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display

is flashing, then release.

3Aim the remote control at the appliance and slowly

alternate between pressing CH/PAGE d and DEVICE X

for the appliance.

The preset code is shown in the remote control display.

4Stop when the appliance turns off.

5Press ENTER once to lock in the code.

0Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset

codes to change the number and verify correct operation.

0If the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered, use the

learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered for use

by the Marantz remote control included with this device. (v p. 272)

NOTE

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may

not operate.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

267

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating devices

To operate an external device, press the input source button registered

with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.

0When operating an external device, the display on the remote control unit shows

the input source name.

0The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.

0To operate the menu of this unit, press AVP before operating the unit. The “AVP”

indicator lights when this unit is being operated.

nTV group

(TV) operation

Operation buttons Function

TV XTV power on/off

TV INPUT Switch TV input

TV MENU TV menu

CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)

INFO Information

OPTION Sub menu, Option

u i o pCursor operation

ENTER(Cursor) Enter

BACK Back

8 9Skip chapter

1Playback

6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

3Pause

2Stop

0 – 9, +10 Channel selection

TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without

pressing the TV button.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

268

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nDVD group

(DVD player / DVD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE XPower on/off

DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu

INFO Information

OPTION Top menu

u i o pCursor operation

ENTER Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Setup

2Stop

3Pause

1Playback

8 9Skip chapter

6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel

selection

nCD group

(CD player / CD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE XPower on/off

DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu

INFO Information

u i o pCursor operation

ENTER Enter

2Stop

3Pause

1Playback

8 9Skip chapter

6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel

selection

Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

269

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nCBL/SAT group

(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/

Media player/IP TV) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE XPower on/off

DEVICE MENU Menu

CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)

INFO Information

u i o pCursor operation

ENTER Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Setup

HOME Home menu

2Stop

3Pause

1Playback

8 9Skip chapter

6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10 Channel selection

nBD group

(Blu-ray Disc player) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE XPower on/off

DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu

INFO Information

OPTION Top menu

u i o pCursor operation

ENTER Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Setup

HOME Home menu

2Stop

3Pause

1Playback

8 9Skip chapter

6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel

selection

Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

270

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Checking registered preset codes

1Press and hold an input source select button for which

you want to check the preset code and the SET button

until the display on the remote control unit shows

“PRSET”.

2Press INFO.

The set code is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display.

Initializing registered preset codes

1Press and hold down AVP and OPTION until “OK”

indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then

release.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

271

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating learning function

TV AUDIO

SET

CBL/SAT

DVD

Blu-ray

AUX1

GAME

AUX2

MEDIA PLAYER

If the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered,

use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be

remembered for use by the Marantz remote control included with this

device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

272

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remembering remote control codes

from other devices

1Place the Marantz remote control and remote control

from the other device approximately 5 cm apart, with

the remote control signal transmission sections facing

each other.

2Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

3Press input source select buttons to select the input

source.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

4Select the button to be learned.

LEARN indicator lights up.

5Press and hold the button that you want to register on

the other remote control until “OK” is displayed on the

Marantz remote control display.

0If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 4

again.

6Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the

same input source.

7When programming of the remote control unit is

completed, press SET.

The LEARN indicator turns off, and the remote control unit exits

learn mode.

0There are some remote control units that cannot be programmed, or even if they

can be programmed, they may not operate correctly. If this happens, use the

remote control unit supplied with the AV equipment to operate it.

0If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown on the remote control

display. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

NOTE

0The learning function is unavailable for all ZONE SELECT, SET, AVP, POWER X,

VOLUME df, SMART SELECT, SOUND MODE and input source select buttons

in any mode.

0If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode,

the remote control unit automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

273

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Delete saved remote control codes

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all

memory contents.

oDelete remote control codes for each button

1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2Press input source select buttons to select the input

source you want to delete.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

3Press and hold POWER X and press the learned button

to be erased twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

4Press SET.

0The LEARN indicator turn off.

oDelete remote control codes for each input

source

1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2Press and hold POWER X and press the learned input

source select buttons to be erased twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

3Press SET.

0The LEARN indicator turn off.

oDelete remote control codes for all input

sources

1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2Press and hold POWER X and press AVP twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

3Press SET.

0The LEARN indicator turn off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

274

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the back light

SET

Light button

You can turn off the backlight of the remote control unit.

0Backlight is set on in the factory settings.

Disabling the backlight

1Press and hold both SET and Light button until “OFF”

indicator flashes twice.

Turning the backlight on

1Press and hold both SET and Light button until “ON”

indicator flashes twice.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

275

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

ENTER

SET

ZONE

SELECT

When the ZONE SELECT is pressed, only the set zone can be operated

with the remote control unit.

This is useful for preventing mistaken operation.

0The factory setting is “M23”.

1Press and hold ZONE SELECT and SET for at least 3

seconds.

2Use ui to set the zone to be used and press ENTER.

“SET” flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal

operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display

Zone to be used

M MAIN ZONE only

M2 MAIN ZONE / ZONE2

M23

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

276

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 278

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 278

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 278

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 278

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume

level 278

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content

such as TV and movies 278

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the

configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new

one 279

I want to combine a desired video with the current music 279

I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening

to the Internet radio 279

I want to delete unused input sources 279

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 279

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game

on my game console 279

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 281

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 282

Display on this unit shows nothing 282

No sound comes out 283

Desired sound does not come out 284

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 287

No video is shown on the TV 288

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 290

iPod cannot be played back 291

USB memory devices cannot be played back 292

File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed

properly 293

Bluetooth cannot be played back 293

The Internet radio cannot be played back 294

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 295

Various online services cannot be played 295

The HDMI control function does not work 296

When it is not possible to connect to a wireless LAN network 297

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 298

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Tips

277

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

0Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.

You can set this for each zone. (v p. 187, 255)

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on

0By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume

level, set the volume level at power on for “Power On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (v p. 187, 255)

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

0Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you

can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 243)

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

0Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu “Dialog Enhancer”. (v p. 133)

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level

0Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost

even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 189)

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies

0Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted

to your desired level. (v p. 190)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

278

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new

one.

0Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 212)

I want to combine a desired video with the current music

0Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while

listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, Internet radio or Bluetooth. (v p. 136)

I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening to the Internet radio

0After playing back photos from Flickr, start the slide show on the Internet radio playback screen. (v p. 132)

I want to delete unused input sources

0Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on

this unit. (v p. 210)

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.

0Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in

MAIN ZONE. (v p. 138)

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console

0When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game”. (v p. 201)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

279

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?

3. Are the other devices operating properly?

If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.

If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power

immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

280

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oPower does not turn on / Power is turned off

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Power does not turn on. 0Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. 84

Power automatically turns

off.

0The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. 157

0“Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To

disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “Off”.

257

The power to this unit does

not turn off when you press

the Power operation

button. “ZONE2 On” or

“ZONE3 On” appears on

the display.

0Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of this unit (standby), press the ZONE2

ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on the main unit or press the ZONE SELECT button on the remote

control and select a zone before pressing the POWER X button.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

281

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Operations cannot be

performed through the

remote control unit.

0Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. 11

0Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°. 11

0Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. －

0Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. 11

0The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb

light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.

－

0The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit.

Press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to operate.

176

0The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press AVP to set the operating

mode to AVP.

268

0When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of

infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the

direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect

operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

－

oDisplay on this unit shows nothing

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Display is off. 0Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”. 258

0When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off. 141

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

282

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNo sound comes out

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

No sound comes out of

speakers.

0Check the connections for all devices. 36

0Insert connection cables all the way in. －

0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －

0Check cables for damage. －

0Check the speaker connections and configurations. 50

0Check the connections for PRE OUT connectors. 46

0Check whether the audio device power is turned on. 63

0Check that a proper input source is selected. 86

0Adjust the volume. 87

0Cancel the mute mode. 87

0Check the digital audio input connector setting. 208

0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output

is set to off by default.

－

0When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the PRE

OUT connector.

－

No sound comes out when

using the DVI-D

connection.

0When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a

separate audio connection.

－

No sound comes out of a

TV that is connected via

HDMI.

0Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV. －

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

283

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDesired sound does not come out

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

The volume does not

increase.

0The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu. 187

0Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings,

so the volume may not reach the upper limit.

－

No sound comes out with

the HDMI connection.

0Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. 64

0When outputting HDMI audio signals from the speakers of a power amp connected to this unit, set “HDMI

Audio Out” in the menu to “AVP”. To output from the TV, set it to “TV”.

197

0When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. 156

No sound comes out of a

specific speaker.

0Check that PRE OUT cables and speaker cables are properly connected. －

0Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu. 235

0Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu. 223

When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.

－

No sound is produced from

subwoofer.

0Check the subwoofer connections. －

0Turn on the subwoofer’s power. －

0Set “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu to “1 spkr” or “2 spkrs”. 235

0When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the

sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.

235

When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.

243

0You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”. 243

DTS sound is not output. 0Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”. －

0Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”. 211

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

284

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Dolby Atmos, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby

Digital Plus audio is not

output.

0Make HDMI connections. 69

0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by

default.

－

DTS Neo:X mode cannot

be selected.

0It cannot be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround” is set for “None”. 235

0DTS Neo:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. －

DTS Neural:X mode cannot

be selected.

0DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. －

Dolby Surround mode

cannot be selected.

0Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones. －

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32,

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,

Audyssey Dynamic

Volume® and Audyssey

LFC™ cannot be selected.

0These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. 212

0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 141

0These cannot be selected when using the headphones. －

Audyssey DSX® cannot be

selected.

0It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers. 236

0It can be selected when using the center speaker. 235

0Switch the sound mode to Dolby sound mode or DTS sound mode. 140

0This cannot be selected when using the headphones. －

0This cannot be set when the input signal is a 2-channel source. －

“M-DAX” cannot be

selected.

0Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of

multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “M-DAX” cannot be used.

186

0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 141

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

285

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

No audio is output from

PRE OUT for ZONE2/

ZONE3.

0In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/

COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.

－

0In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM

format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set “HDMI Audio” in the

menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this

setting. In that case, set the audio format to “PCM (2ch)” on the played back device.

255

0When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the

Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 10 m.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

286

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSound is interrupted or noise occurs

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

During playback from the

Internet radio or USB

memory device, sound is

occasionally interrupted.

0When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. －

0The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy. －

When making a call on

iPhone, noise occurs in

audio output on this unit.

0When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. －

Noise often occurs in

FM/AM broadcasting.

0Change the antenna orientation or position. 77

0Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. －

0Use an FM outdoor antenna. 77

0Separate the antenna from other connection cables. 77

The sounds appear to be

distorted.

0Lower the volume. 87

Sound cuts out when using

Wi-Fi connection.

0If nearby devices cause playback to cut out due to electronic interference, switch to a wired LAN

connection.

0Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the

playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.

248

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

287

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNo video is shown on the TV

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

No picture appears. 0Check the connections for all devices. 64

0Insert connection cables all the way in. －

0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －

0Check cables for damage. －

0Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. 208

0Check that the proper input source is selected. 86

0Check the video input connector setting. 208

0Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. 259

0Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not

compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly. 302

0To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with

HDCP 2.2 only.

－

0The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. 303

0Use an “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High speed cable” that comes with the HDMI logo if

you wish to playback 4K (60/50 Hz) video.

－

No video is shown on the

TV with the DVI-D

connection.

0With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the

copy guard copyright protection (HDCP). 302

No video from an input

source such as a game

console is shown on the

TV.

0When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function may not

function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.

－

While the menu is being

displayed, no video is

shown on the TV.

0The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during

playback of the following video signals.

- Some images of 3D video contents

- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)

- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

- 4K video

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

288

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

When using HDMI ZONE2,

the video output in MAIN

ZONE is interrupted.

0When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in

MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

289

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe menu screen is not displayed on the TV

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

The menu screen or status

information screen is not

displayed on the TV.

0The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is

connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this

unit.

－

0The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.

- Some images of 3D video content

- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)

- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

140

0When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is

not displayed properly.

140

0In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a

sound mode other than the pure direct mode.

140

0Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. 207

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

290

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oiPod cannot be played back

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

iPod cannot be connected. 0When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported. 74

0When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be

recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.

－

The AirPlay icon ' is not

displayed on iTunes /

iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

0This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to

the same LAN as this unit.

0The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to

the latest version.

－

Audio is not output. 0The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes /

iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.

－

0The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the

iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.

125

Audio is interrupted during

the AirPlay playback on

iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

0Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using

AirPlay.

－

0Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by

taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.

－

iTunes cannot be played

back through the remote

control unit.

0Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform

playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

291

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oUSB memory devices cannot be played back

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

“No connection” is

displayed.

0This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. 74

0Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. －

0This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to

the USB port.

－

0The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32. －

0Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized.

When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power

from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.

－

Files on the USB memory

device are not displayed.

0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 93

0This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can

also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.

－

0When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed. －

Files on a USB memory

device cannot be played.

0Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. 305

0You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be

played on this unit.

－

0Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB. －

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

292

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFile names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

The file names are not

displayed properly (“...”,

etc.).

0Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed

are replaced with a “. (period)”.

－

oBluetooth cannot be played back

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Bluetooth devices cannot

be connected to this unit.

0The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the

Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.

－

0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －

0The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. －

0Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again. －

The sound is cut off. 0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －

0Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. －

0To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN

devices and other Bluetooth devices.

－

0Reconnect the Bluetooth device. －

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

293

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe Internet radio cannot be played back

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

A list of broadcasting

stations is not displayed.

0The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. 79

0Perform the network diagnostic mode. －

Internet Radio cannot be

played.

0The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can

be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.

308

0The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. －

0The IP address is not properly set. 250

0Check the power of the router is on. －

0To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the

DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.

250

0To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit. 250

0Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a

while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.

113

Cannot connect to favorite

radio stations.

0Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. －

For some radio stations,

“Connection down” is

displayed and station

cannot be connected to.

0The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. －

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

294

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oMusic files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Files stored on a computer

cannot be played.

0Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. 307

0Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. －

0The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer. －

0Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the

folders on your computer.

117

Server is not found, or it is

not possible to connect to

the server.

0The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings. －

0Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power. －

0Server is not running. Launch the server. －

0Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. 247

Music files on PC cannot

be played back.

0Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC

to this unit through the network.

Files on PC or NAS are not

displayed.

0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 307

Music stored on a NAS

cannot be played.

0If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS

setting.

－

0If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows

Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.

117

0If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target. －

oVarious online services cannot be played

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Various online services

cannot be played.

0The online service may have been discontinued. －

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

295

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe HDMI control function does not work

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

The HDMI control function

does not work.

0Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”. 199

0You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition,

depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case,

operate the external device directly.

156

0Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. 156

0When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link

operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on

again.

156

0The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI control function. Use the HDMI

MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

296

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCannot connect to a wireless LAN network

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

Cannot connect to the

network.

0The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the

network settings according to the setting details of this unit.

249

0Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access

first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access

points.

－

0Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. －

0This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN). －

Cannot connect to WPS. 0Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. －

0Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2

minutes.

－

0A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to

“None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).

249

0If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS

button. In this case, use the “Scan Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.

－

Cannot connect to the

network using iPhone/iPod

touch/iPad.

0Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. －

0When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS

5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

297

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWhen using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly

Symptom Cause / Solution Page

When using MAIN ZONE,

video output is interrupted

in HDMI ZONE2.

0With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video

may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.

－

When using HDMI ZONE2,

no video or audio is output

from the TV in ZONE2.

0Check that the power is on for ZONE2. 171

0Check the input source for ZONE2. 171

0The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function. －

0In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. －

0When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to “PCM”

on the playback device. Alternatively, set “ZONE2 Setup” - “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”.

255

0When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output

resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.

－

When using HDMI ZONE2,

MAIN ZONE audio is

played back as PCM.

0When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited

according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.

－

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

298

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Resetting factory settings

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.

Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

XGAME

A-DSX

1Turn off the power using X.

2Press X while simultaneously pressing GAME and

A-DSX.

3Remove your fingers from the two buttons when

“Initialized” appears on the display.

Before restoring the default setting, the “Save” function of the web control function

can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 163)

However, account information for network content and information on registered

favorites cannot be stored.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

299

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

About HDMI

HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is

an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.

With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio

formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not

possible with the analog video transmission.

Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be

transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional

connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately

for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring

configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.

This unit supports the following HDMI functions.

0Deep Color

An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr,

which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024

shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce

colors in higher definition.

Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.

0“x.v.Color”

This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables

display with natural, vivid colors.

“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.

03D

This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals

of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that

provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.

04K

This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video

signals of HDMI.

0Content Type

It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type

(content information).

0Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color

The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider

color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.

0sYCC601 color

Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is

larger than the traditional RGB color model.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Appendix

300

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Auto Lip Sync

This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and

video.

Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.

0HDMI Pass Through

Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from

the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is

connected to the HDMI output connector.

0HDMI Control

If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or

player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function

setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.

0Power off link

This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.

0Audio output destination switching

From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or

the AV amplifier.

0Volume adjustment

You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment

operation.

0Input source switching

You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input

switching.

When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the

source for that player.

0ARC (Audio Return Channel)

This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through

the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit

based on the HDMI control function.

If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,

video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are

transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the

TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate

audio cable connection is required.

In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI

connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from

the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this

unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback

on this unit for the TV.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

301

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSupported audio formats

2-channel Linear

PCM

2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Multi-channel

Linear PCM

7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Bitstream

Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD /

Dolby Digital Plus / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio / DTS Express

DSD 2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz

oSupported video signals

0480i 0480p

0576i 0576p

0720p 60/50Hz 01080i 60/50Hz

01080p 60/50/24Hz 04K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD

video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to

support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-

bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright

protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of

the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.

0If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio

are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or

player for more information.

When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and

ARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that bears the HDMI

logo.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

302

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video conversion function

This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.

The main zone video conversion

function is compatible with the following

formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM,

NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.

HDMI-compatible TV

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input (IN)

Video signal Video signal

Component video

signal

HDMI signal

Output

Video device This unit

HDMI-incompatible TV

HDMI signal

HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector

Component video

signal

Component video

connectors

Component video

connectors

Component video

connectors

Component video

connectors

Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

303

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 203)

Output signal

Input signal

HDMI

480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz

HDMI

480i/576i P P P P P P P P

480p/576p P P P P P P P

720p P P P P P P

1080i P P P P P P

1080p 24Hz P P P P

1080p P P P P

4K 30/25/24Hz P

4K 60/50Hz P z

Component Video

480i/576i P P P P P P P P

480p/576p P P P P P P P

720p P P P P P P

1080i P P P P P P

1080p P P P P

Video 480i/576i P P P P P P P P

zThe HDMI connector on the front panel is not compatible.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

304

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a USB memory devices

0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.

0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played

back properly.

oCompatible formats

Sampling frequency Bit rate

Extension

WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192

kbps .wma

MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320

kbps .mp3

WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz – .wav

MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320

kbps

.aac/

.m4a/

.mp4

FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz – .flac

ALACz232/44.1/48/88.2/

96 kHz – .m4a

DSD 2.8 MHz – .dsf/

.dff

AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz –.aif/

.aiff

z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.

Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer

may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

z2Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not

use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of

the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

305

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oMaximum number of playable files and folder

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by

this unit are as follows.

Media

Item USB memory device

Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB

Number of folder directory levels z18 levels

Number of folders 500

Number of filesz25000

z1The limited number includes the root folder.

z2The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device

capacity and the file size.

Playing back a Bluetooth device

This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.

0A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):

When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,

monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.

0AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):

When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the

Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.

oAbout Bluetooth communications

Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation

of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and

Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference

may cause malfunctions.

0Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable

gases are generated

0Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

306

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.

0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played

back properly.

0A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.

oSpecifications of supported files

Sampling frequency Bit rate

Extension

WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192

kbps .wma

MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320

kbps .mp3

WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz – .wav

MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320

kbps

.aac/

.m4a/

.mp4

FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz – .flac

ALACz232/44.1/48/88.2/

96 kHz – .m4a

DSD 2.8 MHz – .dsf/

.dff

AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz –.aif/

.aiff

z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.

Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer

may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

z2Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not

use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of

the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

307

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back Internet Radio

oPlayable broadcast station specifications

Sampling frequency Bit rate

Extension

WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192

kbps .wma

MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320

kbps .mp3

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320

kbps

.aac/

.m4a/

.mp4

Personal memory plus function

The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound

mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic

Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.

Last function memory

This function stores the settings which were made before going into the

standby mode.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

308

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound modes and channel output

S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.

D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (v p. 235).

Sound mode

Channel output

Front

L/R Center Surround

L/R

Surround

Back

L/R

Front

Wide

L/R

Front

Height

L/R

Top

Front

L/R

Top

Middle

L/R

Top

Rear

L/R

Rear

Height

L/R

Surround

Height

L/R

Top

Surround

Front

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Surround

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Back

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Subwoofer

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) SDz7

Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) SD DDz3Dz3Dz3D

DSD Direct (2-channel) SDz7

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) SD D D

Stereo S D

Multi Ch In SD DDz3Dz2D

Dolby Surround z1SD DDz4DDDDD DDD D

DTS Neo:X z2SD DDz5Dz5Dz5D

Audyssey DSX® SD D Dz6Dz6D

Dolby Digital SD D D

Dolby Digital Plus SD DDz3Dz3Dz3D

Dolby TrueHD SD DDz3Dz3Dz3D

Dolby Atmos SD D D DDDDDD D D D D

DTS Surround SD D D D

DTS 96/24 SD D D D

DTS-HD SD DDz3Dz3Dz3D

DTS Express SD D D D

Multi Ch Stereo SD DDz5Dz5Dz5Dz5Dz5Dz5Dz5Dz5D

Virtual S D

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

309

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.

z2The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neo:X” and sound modes that have “+Neo:X” in the sound mode name.

z3A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.

z4 Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v p. 236)

z5 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Surround Parameter” – “Speaker Select” settings. (v p. 185)

z6Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Audyssey DSX®” settings. (v p. 191)

z7 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)

Update (DTS:X)

Sound mode

Channel output

Front

L/R Center Surround

L/R

Surround

Back

L/R

Front

Wide

L/R

Front

Height

L/R

Top

Front

L/R

Top

Middle

L/R

Top

Rear

L/R

Rear

Height

L/R

Surround

Height

L/R

Top

Surround

Front

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Surround

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Back

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Subwoofer

DTS:X

SD D D DDDDDD D D D D

DTS Neural:X z8SD D D DDDDDD D D D D

z8The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neural:X” and sound modes that have “+Neural:X” in the sound mode name.

0You can select DTS:X or DTS Neural:X if updated to DTS:X.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

310

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Sound mode

Channel output

Front

L/R Center Surround

L/R

Surround

Back

L/R

Front

Wide

L/R

Front

Height

L/R

Top

Front

L/R

Top

Middle

L/R

Top

Rear

L/R

Rear

Height

L/R

Surround

Height

L/R

Top

Surround

Front

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Surround

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Back

Dolby

Atmos

Enabled

L/R

Subwoofer

Auro-3D

SD D D Dz9DDz10 D

Auro-2D Surround SD D D D

z9For the best Auro-3D experience surround height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute rear height speakers in place of surround height speakers.

z10 This is output if an Auro-3D signal is input and the input signal contains Top Surround.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

311

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound modes and surround parameters

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Subwoofer

Level Adjust Cinema EQ

Loudness

Management

Dynamic

Compression

Low Frequency

Speaker Select Center Spread Center Gain Dialog Control DTS Neural:X

Direct/Pure Direct

(2-channel) z4Sz5SS

Direct/Pure Direct

(Multi-channel) z4S SSS

DSD Direct (2-channel) Sz5

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4SS

Stereo SSS

Multi Ch In SS S

Dolby Surround SSSS S

DTS Neo:X SSSS S S

Audyssey DSX® SSSSS

Dolby Digital SSSSS

Dolby Digital Plus SSSSS

Dolby TrueHD SSSSS

Dolby Atmos SSSSS

DTS Surround SS SS

DTS 96/24 SS S

DTS-HD SS S

DTS Express SS S

Multi Ch Stereo S SSSS

Virtual S SSS

z1 - z5 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 316)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

312

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Dialog

Enhancer

Tone

Audyssey

M-DAX

Bass Sync

z10

Auro-Matic

3D Preset

Auro-Matic

3D Strength

MultEQ®

XT32

Dynamic EQ

Dynamic

Volume

Audyssey

LFCTM

Audyssey

DSX®

Direct/Pure Direct

(2-channel) z4

Direct/Pure Direct

(Multi-channel) z4

DSD Direct (2-channel)

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4

Stereo SSSSSS SS

Multi Ch In SSSSSSS S

Dolby Surround SSSSSS S

DTS Neo:X SSSSSS S

Audyssey DSX® SSSSSSSSS

Dolby Digital SSSSSSS S

Dolby Digital Plus SSSSSSS S

Dolby TrueHD SSSSSSS S

Dolby Atmos SSSSSS S

DTS Surround SSSSSSS S

DTS 96/24 SSSSSSS S

DTS-HD SSSSSSS S

DTS Express SSSSSSS S

Multi Ch Stereo SSSSSS SS

Virtual SSSSS SS

z4, z6 – z10 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 316)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

313

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Subwoofer

Level Adjust Cinema EQ

Loudness

Management

Dynamic

Compression

Low Frequency

Speaker Select Center Spread Center Gain Dialog Control

z12 DTS Neural:X

DTS:X

SS SS SS

DTS Neural:X SSSS

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Dialog

Enhancer

Tone

Audyssey

M-DAX

Bass Sync

z10

Auro-Matic

3D Preset

Auro-Matic

3D Strength

MultEQ®

XT32

z7z13

Dynamic EQ

Dynamic

Volume

Audyssey

LFCTM

Audyssey

DSX®

DTS:X

SSSSSS S

DTS Neural:X SSSSSS S

z1 - z3, z6 - z10 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 316)

z12 This item can be selected when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.

z13 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

0You can select DTS:X or DTS Neural:X if updated to DTS:X.

0DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

314

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Subwoofer

Level Adjust Cinema EQ

Loudness

Management

Dynamic

Compression

Low Frequency

Speaker Select Center Spread Center Gain Dialog Control DTS Neural:X

Auro-3D SS S

Auro-2D Surround SS S

Sound mode

Surround Parameter

Dialog

Enhancer

Tone

Audyssey

M-DAX

Bass Sync

z10

Auro-Matic

3D Preset

Auro-Matic

3D Strength

MultEQ®

XT32

Dynamic EQ

Dynamic

Volume

Audyssey

LFCTM

Audyssey

DSX®

Auro-3D Sz11 Sz11 SSSSSS SS

Auro-2D Surround SSSSSS SS

z1 - z3, z6 - z11 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 316)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

315

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played back.

z2This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or DTS is played back.

z3This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.

z4During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.

z5 This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)

z6 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 189)

z7This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.

z8This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT32” in the menu is set to “Off”. (v p. 188)

z9This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.

z10 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.

z11 This can be set if the input signal does not contain an Auro-3D signal or if the input Auro-3D signal does not contain Front Height channels.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

316

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes

F This indicates the default sound mode.

S This indicates the selectable sound mode.

Sound mode NOTE

2-channel signal Multi-channel signal

Analog /

PCM

Dolby

Digital

(+/HD)

DTS

(-HD)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

PCM

Multi DTS:X DTS-

DTS

Express

DTS ES

Dscrt6.1

DTS ES

Mtrx6.1 DTS Dolby

Atmos

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

Digital

Plus

Dolby

Digital

(EX)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

Auro-

DTS Surround

DTS-HD MSTR Fz3Sz12

DTS-HD HI RES Fz4

DTS ES Dscrt6.1 z1F

DTS ES Mtrx6.1 z1F

DTS Surround SSF

DTS 96/24 Fz5

DTS(-HD) + Dolby Surround SSSSS

DTS Express F

DTS(-HD) + Neo:X z2SSSSS Sz12

DTS Neo:X SSFS

Dolby Surround

Dolby Atmos F

Dolby TrueHD Sz6SSz13

Dolby Digital+ Sz7S

Dolby(D+)(HD) +

Dolby Surround FFF

Dolby Digital S

Dolby(D)(D+)(HD) + Neo:X z2Sz8SSS Sz13

Dolby Surround SFSS

z1-z8, z12, z13: “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 320)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

317

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound mode NOTE

2-channel signal Multi-channel signal

Analog /

PCM

Dolby

Digital

(+/HD)

DTS

(-HD)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

PCM

Multi DTS:X DTS-

DTS

Express

DTS ES

Dscrt6.1

DTS ES

Mtrx6.1 DTS Dolby

Atmos

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

Digital

Plus

Dolby

Digital

(EX)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

Auro-

Multi Ch In

Multi Ch In FFSz14

Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround S S

Multi Ch In + Neo:X z2S S

Multi Ch In 7.1 z1Fz10

Audyssey

Audyssey DSX® SSSSSSSz8SSSS

Direct

Direct Sz9SS SSSS SSS S SSS S

DSD Direct S S

Pure Direct

Pure Direct SSS SSSSSSSS SSS S

DSD Pure Direct S S

Original sound mode

Multi Ch Stereo SSSSSSSSSSSS SSSSS

Virtual SSSSSSSSSSSSz8SSSSS

Stereo

Stereo F SSFSSSS S SS S SSSSS

z1, z2, z8 - z10, z14 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 320)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

318

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update (DTS:X)

Sound mode NOTE

2-channel signal Multi-channel signal

Analog /

PCM

Dolby

Digital

(+/HD)

DTS

(-HD)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

PCM

Multi DTS:X DTS-

DTS

Express

DTS ES

Dscrt6.1

DTS ES

Mtrx6.1 DTS Dolby

Atmos

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

Digital

Plus

Dolby

Digital

(EX)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

Auro-

DTS Surround

DTS:X MSTR / DTS:X F

DTS (-HD) + Neural:X z15 SS SSS

DTS Neural:X z15 SSFS

Dolby Surround

Dolby (D) (D+) (HD) + Neural:X

Sz8SSS

Multi Ch In

Multi Ch In + Neural:X S S

z8This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.

z15 This item cannot be selected when a DTS(-HD) format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

0You can select DTS:X or DTS Neural:X if updated to DTS:X.

0DTS Neo:X is no longer supported once you update to DTS:X.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Sound mode NOTE

2-channel signal Multi-channel signal

Analog /

PCM

Dolby

Digital

(+/HD)

DTS

(-HD)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

PCM

Multi DTS:X DTS-

DTS

Express

DTS ES

Dscrt6.1

DTS ES

Mtrx6.1 DTS Dolby

Atmos

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

Digital

Plus

Dolby

Digital

(EX)

DSD

(Super

Audio

CD)

Auro-

Auro-3D

Auro-3D z11 SSSSS SSSSSSz6z7SSSSS

Auro-2D Surround z11 S SSSS SS S SSSz6z7SSSSS

z6, z7, z11 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 320)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

319

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.

z2The “Cinema” mode, “Music” mode or “Game” mode can be selected. This item can be selected when using any of the surround back, front height or front wide speaker.

z3This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.

z4This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.

z5This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.

z6This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.

z7This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.

z8This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.

z9The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.

z10 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.

z11 This item cannot be selected if the sampling frequency of the input signal is 32 kHz.

z12 This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains DTS-HD Master Audio.

z13 This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains Dolby TrueHD.

z14 This item can be selected if the Auro-3D signal contains Multi Channel PCM.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

320

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Explanation of terms

oAudyssey

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®

Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume

is decreased by taking into account human perception and room

acoustics.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32

to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)

Audyssey DSX® is a new surround enhancement technology that raises

the surround effect and impression to realize a larger surround space by

adding a new channel to the existing 5.1 channel system.

In research on human hearing characteristics, two points can be broadly

cited as elements that enhance the surround effect. The most important

point is the creation of horizontal spread (wide channel) at the front

(forward) area in composing a realistic surround space. The next

important point is the creation of vertical spread (height channel) in the

front (forward) area using recognizable (audible) acoustic signals so as to

create a surround space with depth.

Audyssey DSX® then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the

next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition, Audyssey

DSX® does not simply add a channel but combines the existing front,

surround and rear surround sound to develop a technology known as

“Surround Envelopment Processing” which has been incorporated into

Audyssey DSX® to further enhance the effect.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

321

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level

between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud

passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic

Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the

perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog

clarity remain the same.

Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)

Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing

people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically

monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass

through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic

processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room.

The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates

any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every

listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,

MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both

time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also

performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

oAuro-3D

Auro-3D®

The Auro-3D® technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology

that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools

to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D® is

the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs.

Auro-Matic®

Auro-Matic® up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that

transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or

2D listening experience.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

322

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDolby

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of

dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos

is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio

as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and

move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during

playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height

plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV

pre tuner via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc,

downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains

special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room.

This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV pre tuner and

scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of

every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby

Laboratories.

A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2

surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low

frequency effects.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic

sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,

movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround

sound experience in the home.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is

compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also

improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is

upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater

flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the

playback device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

323

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Dolby Surround

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently

up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround

speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker

layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-

ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers)

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos

Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for

reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers

feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These

features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker

module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while

providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and

Dolby surround playback.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby

Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the

sound of the studio master.

This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels

with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

324

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDTS

DTS

This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio

system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic

surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie

theaters and screening rooms.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in

5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization

on DVD-Video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,

Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to

5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format

adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.

Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible

according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround

back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix

encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also

possible according to the decoder.

DTS Express

DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-

channels, 24 to 256 kbps).

DTS-HD

This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced

functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional

audio for Blu-ray Disc.

This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high

sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels

are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

325

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional

DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling

frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital

sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This

format is fully compatible with conventional products, including

conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital

Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8

audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and

up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit

resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including

conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS Neo:X

This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to

playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround sources as a

maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound. There are 3 modes: “Music”

suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game”

which is optimized for playing games.

Update (DTS:X)

Dialog Control

Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out

from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired.

This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.

DTS:X

DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient

backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to

move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.

DTS Neural:X

Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X

can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all

speakers in your surround sound system.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

326

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAudio

ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)

This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by

Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data

compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly

the same original data.

Bass Sync

Audio sources such as BD and DVD inherently have time delay between

the bass components of the satellite channel and the LFE channel. This

function adjusts such a delay for reproducing (replaying) richer bass

sound during playback. This function is by default set to 0 msec. Since the

delay varies according to the title, play back the audio source and adjust to

the most effective value for playback. For some audio sources that are

played back, this function may have little effect.

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)

FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio

file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss

in quality.

The FLAC license is as shown below.

2009 Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its

contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written permission.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

327

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

LFE

This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output

channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is

intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system

subwoofer(s).

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)

This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,

using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data

volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound

quality equivalent to a music CD.

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for

the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1

Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio

standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft

Corporation.

WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.

To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft

Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work

properly.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

328

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sampling frequency

Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at

regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in

digitized format (producing a digital signal).

The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling

frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the

original.

Dialog normalization function

This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,

Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.

It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program

sources.

Dynamic range

The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the

minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.

Downmix

This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a

lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s

configuration.

oVideo

ISF

ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video

technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment

to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the

optimization of device video performance.

Progressive (sequential scanning)

This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video

as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides

images with less flickering and jagged edges.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

329

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNetwork

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current

DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be

applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael”

algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into

blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of

128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well,

offering extremely high encryption security.

AirPlay

AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod

touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.

DLNA

DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of

Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible

with other DLNA CERTIFIED® products.

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)

This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the

same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the

network key used for encryption for each packet.

vTuner

This is a free online content server for Internet Radio.

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.

vTuner website:

http://www.radiomarantz.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing

Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such

technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from

Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

WEP Key (network key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data

transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and

decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for

communications to be established between them.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

330

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wi-Fi®

Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi

Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to

the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also

uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger

security.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

compatible with more secure AES encryption.

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a

preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and

client.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of

setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security. There are

two methods: push-button and PIN (Personal Identification Number) code.

Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent

interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network

names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication

is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is

suitable for temporarily constructing a simplified network.

Modem

Device that connects to your broadband internet provider, and is very

often supplied with the service. A type that is integrated with a router is

also often available.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

331

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oMedia player

iTunes

iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc.

iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc. It

enables management and playback of multimedia contents including

music and movies. iTunes supports many main file formats including AAC,

WAV, and MP3.

Windows Media Player

This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.

It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player,

as well as WMA, WAV, and other files.

oOthers

App Store

App Store is a site that sells application software for such devices as the

iPhone or iPod Touch, and is operated by Apple Inc.

HDCP

When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright

protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being

copied without authorization.

MAIN ZONE

The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.

ZONE2

This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is

placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback

is called ZONE2.

ZONE3

This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is

placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback

is called ZONE3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

332

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing

Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a

Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices

authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections

occurring.

When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this

unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.

This unit can store pairing information for a maximum of 8 devices.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

333

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Trademark information

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory

has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,

respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this

accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

0Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod

nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of

non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is

permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and

foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic

EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey DSX® and Audyssey

LFC™ are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.

is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their

respective owners.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby

Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

334

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license

from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the

Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio

Reserved.

Update (DTS:X)

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license

from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,

DTS:X, and the DTSX logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of

Rights Reserved.

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the

HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing

LLC in the United States and other countries.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by

U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.

Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the

interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies

interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

Adobe, the Adobe logo and Reader are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

335

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Upgrade (Auro-3D)

Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies.

Auro-3D® and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro

Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by

displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of

Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of

that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or

other notice from copies of the content.

Auro Technologies: mail info@auro-technologies.com,

phone +32-(0)-14314343, fax +32-(0)-14321224, www.auro-

technologies.com

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

336

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specifications

oAudio section

0Analog

Input sensitivity/Input impedance: Unbalanced RCA input:200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms

Balanced XLR input:400 mV/94 kΩ/kohms

Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)

S/N: 105 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)

Rated output: Unbalanced RCA pre-output : 1.2 V

Balanced XLR pre-output: 2.4 V

0Digital

D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

S/N ratio — 102 dB

Dynamic range — 100 dB

Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface

0Phono equalizer

Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV

RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N: 74 dB （IHF-A、with 5 mV input)

Rated output: 150 mV

Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

337

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo section

0Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB

0Color component video connector

Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB

oTuner section [FM] [AM]

(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)

Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz 522 kHz – 1611 kHz

Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV

50 dB sensitivity: MONO ― 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)

S/N ratio: MONO ― 70 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)

STEREO ― 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion: MONO ― 0.7 % (1 kHz)

STEREO ― 1.0 % (1 kHz)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

338

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard): Wi-Fi® compliant z1

Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit

WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)

WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

Radio frequency: 2.4 GHz

No. of channels: 1 – 13 ch

z1The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

339

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oBluetooth section

Communications system: Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)

Transmission power: Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2)

Maximum communication range: Approx. 10 m in line of sightz2

Frequency band: 2.4 GHz band

Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)

Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4

Corresponding codec: SBC, AAC

Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz

z2The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from

microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

oGeneral

Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption: 90 W

Power consumption in standby mode: 0.2 W

Power consumption in CEC standby

mode: 0.5 W

Power consumption in network standby

mode: 2.7 W

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

340

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDimensions (Unit : mm)

55 39 11

171

185

248

361

410

267

389

50 340

440

oWeight: 13.6 kg

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

341

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Index

v Numerics

11.1-channel ............................................ 50, 57

3D ................................................................ 300

4K ................................................................ 300

5.1-channel ........................................ 43, 50, 53

7.1-channel .................................................... 54

9.1-channel .............................................. 55, 59

v A

Accessories ................................................... 10

Add New Feature ......................................... 262

Adjusting the volume ...................................... 87

Adjusting volume of each channel ................ 134

AirPlay .......................................................... 124

All Zone Stereo ............................................ 138

Audio formats ....................... 302, 305, 307, 308

Audio settings ....................................... 173, 179

Audyssey DSX® .......................................... 321

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 321

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 322

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 322

Audyssey settings ................................ 188, 214

Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 212

Auro-3D ............................................................ 9

Auto Standby ............................................... 257

v B

Bi-amp connection ......................................... 58

v C

Cables ............................................................ 35

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ................... 70

Connecting a cable TV ................................... 69

Connecting a DVD player ............................... 70

Connecting a game console ........................... 71

Connecting a satellite tuner ............................ 69

Connecting a set-top box ............................... 69

Connecting a TV ................................. 64, 65, 66

Connecting a video camera ........................... 71

Connecting an external control device ........... 81

Connecting an iPod ........................................ 74

Connecting an USB memory device .............. 74

Connecting an FM/AM antenna ...................... 77

Connecting a power cord ............................... 84

Connecting to a home network (LAN) ............ 79

Connecting ZONE2/ZONE3 ......................... 168

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

342

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v D

Direct sound mode ....................................... 149

Display ........................................................... 24

DLNA ........................................................... 330

Dolby Atmos ................................................. 323

Dolby sound mode ............................... 143, 323

DTS sound mode ................................. 144, 325

DTS:X .............................................................. 8

v E

Error messages (Audyssey® Setup) ............ 220

Explanation of terms/technology .......... 300, 321

v F

Firmware Update .......................................... 261

Front panel ..................................................... 19

v G

General settings ................................... 175, 254

v H

HDCP ........................................................... 302

HDMI Control ....................................... 156, 199

v I

Input Assign ................................................. 208

Input signal ................................................... 317

Input source settings ............................ 174, 208

Inputting characters ...................................... 177

Inserting the batteries ..................................... 11

iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 90

iTunes .......................................................... 332

v J

JPEG ...................................................... 93, 116

v L

Listening position ......................................... 212

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts .................... 102

Listening to Spotify ....................................... 127

v M

M-DAX ......................................................... 186

Menu map .................................................... 173

v N

Network settings .......................................... 247

v O

Original sound mode .................................... 148

v P

Pairing a Bluetooth device ...................... 97, 100

PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 147

Picture Mode ................................................ 137

Playing back a Bluetooth device .................... 98

Playing back a Blu-ray Disc player ................. 87

Playing back a DVD player ............................. 87

Playing back an iPod ...................................... 88

Playing back Flickr ....................................... 123

Playing back from PC ................................... 116

Playing back Internet Radio ......................... 112

Playing back NAS ........................................ 116

Playing back USB memory device ................. 93

Playing back ZONE2/ZONE3 ....................... 168

Preset codes ................................................ 345

Pure Direct ................................................... 141

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

343

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v R

Random playback .................................. 92, 129

Rear panel ...................................................... 28

Remote control unit ........................................ 31

Remove from Favorites ................................ 131

Repeat playback .................................... 92, 129

Resetting factory settings ............................. 299

v S

Save to Favorites ......................................... 130

Selecting the input source .............................. 86

Setup Assistant ............................................ 175

Sleep timer ................................................... 157

Slideshow .................................................... 132

Slideshow Interval ........................................ 133

Smart select function .................................... 159

Sound mode ................................. 140, 309, 312

Speaker Settings .................................. 174, 212

Stereo sound mode ...................................... 149

v T

Text Search .................................................. 131

Tips .............................................................. 278

Tone Control ................................................ 135

Troubleshooting ........................................... 280

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) ..... 87

Turning the power on ..................................... 86

v V

Video Conversion ................................. 202, 303

Video Select ................................................. 136

Video settings ....................................... 173, 194

v W

Web control .................................................. 162

Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 248

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

344

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

List of preset codes

To return a preset code to the default settings, register the AVP code “0000” to the button whose preset code you want to cancel.

AVP

MMarantz 0000

CBL/SAT group

Registrable input source button :

Access Communications

4081

Adams Cable TV 4081

Alabama Broadband 4081

Alphastar 4027

Alta Utilities 4075

Americable International

4075

Amstrad 4076, 4046, 4047, 4050

Anne Arundel Broadband

4081

Apple TV 4068

Arledge Electronics 4074, 4081

Armstrong 4081

Astound Broadband 4075, 4081

ATMC 4081

Atsky 4048

Ballard Rural

Telephone Cooperative

4074

Bee Line Cable 4081

Bell 4074

Bell Satellite TV 4074

Bend Broadband 4081

Blue Ridge

Communications 4075

Boycom Cablevision 4081

Bright House 4075, 4081

Bristol Tennessee

Essential Services 4075

BSkyB 4076, 4021, 4045, 4046

Buckeye Cable System

4081

Cable America 4075

Cable Axion Digitel 4081

Cable Cable 4075

Cablecom 4080

Cable &

Communications 4081

Cable One 4081

Cable Suite 4081

Cable TV of Camrose

4081

Cablevision du Nord 4081

Cablevision of

Marion County 4081

Cable Vision Services

4075

Cablevision 4075, 4081

Canal+ 4082

CanalSat 4082

CAS Cable 4081

CCAP 4075

Chaparral 4039

Chambers Cable 4081

Charter 4075, 4081

Chester Telephone 4081

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

345

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group

Registrable input source button :

Cincinnati Bell 4075, 4081

Citizens Cable TV 4081

Cisco

Cogeco

4075, 4080

Coast Cable

Communications 4081

Coast Communications

4081

Community Cable

& Broadband 4081

Comcast 4075, 4081

Comporium 4075

Coop CSCF 4081

Consolidated

Communications 4081

Coosa Cable 4081

Country Cablevision 4081

Country Cablevision Ltd.

4081

CRRS-TV 4081

Delta Cable 4081

Dish Mexico 4074

Dishpro 4074

Direct Tv 4001, 4016, 4044

Dish Network 4030

Drake 4026

East Arkansas Video 4081

EastLink 4081

DRE 4051

Easton Cable 4075

Echostar

Eurosky 4056, 4047

Express Vu 4017

Cox 4075, 4081

4074, 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,

4020, 4062, 4063, 4064

Fayetteville

Electric System 4075

Columbus Telephone 4081

FirstMile 4081

Florida Cable 4081

4075

4051

4056

4025

4081

Foothills Rural

Telephone Cooperative

Foxtel

Freesat

Fujitsu

GCI

4002, 4008, 4009

4036, 4037

General Instruments

4051

General Satellite

4081

Glenwood

Telecommunications

4075, 4081

Grande

Communications

4044, 4057

Gradiente

4081

Harlan Community TV

4081

Harlan Municipal

Utilities

4001, 4015

Hitachi

4081

4074

4001, 4016

4078, 4079, 4049, 4050, 4051,

4052, 4053

4081

4075

4081

4075

4025

4074, 4017

4078

4081

4075

4069

4081

4000

4081

4075

4081

HomeTel

Hood Canal

Cablevision

Horizon Cable TV

HTS

Hughes Network

Humax

HunTel Systems

ImOn

Communications

Inside Connect Cable

Insight

Inter Mountain Cable

Janeil

JVC

Kabel Deutschland

KBS Cable TV

Knology

LG Smart TV

Liberty Cablevision

Lincoln Cable

Television

Loretel Systems

Madison

Communications

Marantz

Markdale Cable TV

MCV Broadband

Mediacom

Mediapolis

Telephone

Mediastream

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

346

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group

Registrable input source button :

Mid-Rivers

Communications

MetroCast

Cablevision

Midcontinent

Communications

4081

4075

4081

Minet

MetroNet

4001

Mitsubishi 3007

Mosaic Telecom 4081

Morristown Utility

Systems 4075

Motorola 4081

MTC Technologies 4081

Muscatine Power

& Water 4081

Netgear Neo TV 4072

Nextgen

Communications 4075, 4081

Nokia 4058, 4059, 4060, 4061

Northland

Communications 4081

Northwest Iowa

Telephone 4075

Northwest

Telephone Cooperative

4081

NorthwesTel 4081

Novus 4081

NuLink 4075

NTL 4077

Optima 4048

Optus 4077

Orbitel

Communications 4081

Pace 4075, 4077, 4076, 4079, 4080, 4081,

4082

Panasonic 4004, 4010

Panhandle Telephone

4081

Philips 4080, 4031,4035, 4044, 4057

Pine Bluff Cable 4081

Pioneer 4075

Proscan 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

PTCI 4081

Radio Shack 4036, 4037

Rancho Murieta

Association 4081

RCA 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

RCN 4081

Realistic 4040

Reservation

Telephone 4081

Resort Cable 4081

Rogers 4075, 4081

Roku XDS 4073

Rural Cable 4036

Rural Telephone

Company 4081

Samsung 4075, 4076, 4077, 4022, 4027, 4042,

4043, 4054, 4055, 4050

Schneider 4041, 4043

Scientiﬁc Atlanta 4075

Service Electric 4081

Shaw 4081

Shentel 4081

Sjoberg's Cable TV 4081

SKY 4076, 4079, 4044, 4045, 4057

Sky Deutschland 4079

Skyplus 4048

Skysat 4041, 4047, 4056

Source Cable 4081

Sony 4003, 4012, 4014, 4065, 4066, 4067,

4014, 4070

Sun Country Cable 4081

Star Choice 4032

Star Trak 4024

STS 4038

Suddenlink 4075, 4081

SuperDish 4028

TDS Telecom 4074

Teac 4049

Teledistribution

Amos

4081

Telus 4074

Texas Mid-Gulf

Cablevision 4081

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

347

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group

Registrable input source button :

Tricolor TV 4051

Tri-County Cable TV 4081

Troy Cablevision 4081

TV Cable Company

of Andalusia 4081

Universum 4075

Uniden 4005, 4006, 4013

United Communications

Association

4081

Utilities Board City

of Foley 4081

UPC 4077, 4080

UPC Cablecom 4080

Valparaiso

Communications 4081

Videotron 4075

Video Pall 4025

Vision

Communications 4081

Virgin Media 4077

Volcano Vision 4081

VTR 4081

Wadsworth Cable TV

4081

Waitsﬁeld Cable 4081

Wave Broadband 4081

Western Iowa

Telephone 4075

Western Digital

WD TV 4071

Westman

Communications 4081

White County Video 4081

WideOpenWest 4081

Willamette

Broadband 4081

Windom

Communications 4075

WOW! 4075, 4081

Xﬁnity 4075, 4081

Zenith 4033, 4025, 4023

Thomson 4076, 4080, 4046, 4056

Time Warner 4075, 4081

Toshiba 4001, 4034

Total Cable Service 4081

Triangle

Communication System

4074

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

348

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio group

Registrable input source button :

Advantage 3063

AH! 3106

Aiwa 3104, 3106, 3001, 3002, 3003

Akai 3004, 3005, 3006

Arcam 3106, 3107

Atoll Electronique 3106

Audio 3007

Audio LABS 3008

Audio Research 3106

Audiolab 3106

Audiomeca 3106

Audioton 3106

AVI 3106

Cairn 3106

California 3008

Cambridge 3106

Carver 3106, 3009, 3010, 3011

Casio 3012, 3020

Copland 3109

Curtis 3020, 3012

Cyrus 3106

Denon 3013, 3108

DKK 3097

Dual 3108

Dynaco 3106

Emerson 3014

Fisher 3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

Garrard 3109

GE 3109

Genexxa

3063, 3014, 3021, 3020

Goldmund 3106

Grundig 3106

Harman/Kardon 3106

Harmon 3022, 3023, 3051

Hitachi 3063, 3020

Inkel 3024

Integra 3110

JC Penney 3012, 3020, 3025

JVC 3026, 3027

Kardon 3022, 3051, 3023

Kenwood

3106, 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031,

3032, 3033

Krell 3106, 3010

Linn 3106

Loewe 3106

Luxman 3109, 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

LX I 3012, 3020, 3014

Magnavox 3106, 3010, 3039, 3040

Marantz 3000, 3106, 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

Mathes 3012, 3020

Matsui 3106

MCS 3012, 3020

Memorex 3063

Meridian 3106

MGA 3023

Micromega 3106

Mission 3106, 3010

Mitsubishi 3023, 3044

Musical Fidelity 3109

Myryad 3106

NAD 3097, 3034, 3045

Naim 3106

Nakamichi 3046, 3047, 3048

NEC MCS 3025

Nikko 3007, 3016

NSM 3106

Onkyo 3110, 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,

3055, 3102, 3103

Optimus 3063 3097, 3011, 3014, 3020,3028,

3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,3058

Orion 3109

Panasonic 3008, 3060, 3061

Philips 3106, 3009, 3010, 3040

Pioneer 3110, 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064

Primare 3106

Proton 3106

QED 3106

Quad 3106

Quasar 3008

Radiola 3106

RCA

3063, 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067,

3068, 3069

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

349

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio group

Registrable input source button :

Realistic 3011 3014, 3020, 3042, 3054, 3057

Restek 3106

Revox 3106

Rotel 3106, 3010

RS Original 3070

SAE 3106, 3010, 3083

Samsung 3071

Sansui 3106, 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

Sanyo 3011, 3018,3074, 3075,3076

Scott 3014

Sears 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,3042

Sharp 3028, 3042, 3077

Sherwood 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,3024

Shure 3025

Siemens 3106

Simaudio 3106

Sonic Frontiers 3106

Sony 3039, 3079, 3080,3081,3082, 3097,

3098, 3099, 3100, 3101

Symphonic 3083

Sylvania 3010

TAG McLaren 3106

Tandy 3063

Teac 3109, 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084,

3085, 3086

Technica

Theta Digital 3040

3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088

Thorens 3106

Thule Audio 3106

Toshiba 3045

Universum

3106

Victor 3026

Wadia 3106

Wards 3106,3063,3097

Yamaha 3105,3063,3007,3089,3090,3091,

3092

Zenith 3016,3093,3094,3095,3096

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

350

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group

Registrable input source button :

Acer 1141

Aiko 1059

Admiral 1009, 1089, 1002

Aiwa 1117, 1118

Akai 1161, 1164, 1172, 1001

Amtron 1023

Anam 1113

Anam National 1023, 1069, 1092

AOC 1003, 1049, 1024, 1127

Aristona 1172

Audiovox 1023

Baird 1161

Barco 1172

Basic Line 1172

Bell & Howell 1009, 1025

Benq 1104, 1142

Berthen 1172

Blue Sky 1172

BPL 1161

Broksonic 1097, 1098, 1113, 1003

Bush 1161, 1172

Celebrity 1001

Citizen 1003, 1023, 1059, 1063, 1026, 1013

Colortyme 1003, 1043

Contec/Cony 1045, 1047, 1023, 1113

Craig 1023, 1113, 1020, 1022

Crown 1161, 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes 1003, 1110, 1025, 1062, 1026, 1103,

1013

Daewoo 1003, 1059, 1024, 1084, 1101, 1013,

1035, 1036, 1172

Dansai 1161

Daytron 1003, 1013, 1016

De Graaf 1161

Dimensia 1110, 1103

Direct TV 1152

Dumont 1010, 1003, 1153

D-Vision 1172

Elbe 1172

Electroband 1001

Electrohome

1003, 1133, 1001, 1069

Emerson

1003, 1020, 1044, 1038, 1045, 1048,

1055, 1023, 1025, 1061, 1022, 1094,

1096, 1099, 1013, 1113, 1101, 1015,

1021

Envision 1003

ESA 1164

Finlandia 1161

Finlux 1172

Fisher 1161, 1051, 1025, 1091, 1160

Firstline 1161, 1172

Freesat 1165

Fujitsu 1038, 1155, 1124, 1125

Funai 1038, 1023, 1113

Gateway 1150

1110, 1003, 1085, 1046, 1054, 1133,

1018, 1069, 1022, 1103, 1113, 1136,

1153

Goldstar 1045, 1024, 1112, 1080, 1100, 1013,

1003, 1030, 1154

Goodmans 1172

Granada 1161

Grandin 1172

Grundig 1172

Hallmark 1003

Hanseatic 1172

Hisense 1172, 1161, 1116

Hitachi

1041, 1003, 1045, 1047, 1032, 1065,

1068, 1088, 1082, 1037, 1094, 1031,

1159, 1145, 1139, 1012, 1140

Hypson 1172

Inﬁnity 1067

Internal 1172

ITT 1161

ITT Nokia 1161

Janeil 1134

JBL 1067

JC Penney

1003, 1046, 1047, 1054, 1133, 1110,

1019, 1112, 1024, 1063, 1018, 1026,

1083, 1085, 1100, 1103,1013,1154

Jensen 1003

JMB 1172

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

351

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group

Registrable input source button :

Jubilee 1172

JVC 1045, 1047, 1050, 1060, 1065, 1028,

1029

Kathrein 1172

Kawasho 1003, 1001

Kenwood 1003

Kloss Novabeam 1056, 1023, 1057, 1134

Kneissel 1172

KTV 1023, 1073, 1099, 1013,1113,1033,

1034

LG 1162, 1171, 1172, 1024,1030

Luxor 1161

MM.Wards 1002, 1009, 1038

Magnavox 1175, 1003, 1052, 1053, 1056, 1057,

1063, 1081, 1067, 1106

Marantz 1000, 1172, 1003, 1122, 1067, 1031

Matsui 1161, 1172

Mitsubishi 1172, 1003, 1051, 1133, 1122, 1024,

1115

Motorola 1069, 1014

Myryad 1172

NEC 1029, 1003, 1043, 1024, 1069, 1012

Neckermann 1172

NET-TV 1137, 1150

Neufunk 1172

Nokia 1161

Oceanic 1161

Onida 1029

Orion 1172, 1020, 1096

Osaki 1172

Paciﬁc 1172

Otto Versand 1172

Panasonic 1165, 1067, 1069, 1111, 1017, 1095

Philips

1172, 1175, 1003, 1045, 1052, 1054,

1056, 1057, 1058, 1063, 1069, 1067,

1011

Philips Magnavox 1106, 1067

Pioneer 1003, 1018, 1070, 1071, 1037, 1094,

1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync 1135

Portland 1003, 1059, 1024, 1013

Price Club 1026

Prism

1018

Proscan 1110, 1085, 1103, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1008

Pro Vision 1172

Proton 1003, 1045

Pye 1172

Quasar 1069, 1073, 1111, 1010, 1153

Radiola 1172

Radio Shack 1025, 1103, 1113, 1024

Radio Shack/Realistic

1003, 1045, 1023, 1110, 1025, 1015,

1100, 1013

RCA

1110, 1003, 1049, 1024, 1069, 1075,

1079, 1085, 1087, 1088, 1093, 1094,

1101, 1103, 1113, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1008, 1153, 1014

Realistic 1025, 1103

Runco 1010, 1153

SSalora 1161

Sampo 1150

Samsung

1163, 1164, 1172, 1003, 1045, 1024,

1062, 1026, 1078, 1083, 1090, 1100,

1013, 1105, 1040, 1146, 1148, 1120,

1121, 1114, 1157

Sansui 1119

Sanyo 1161, 1166, 1003, 1051, 1025, 1072,

1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158

SBR 1172

Schneider 1172

Sharp

1177, 1029, 1173, 1003, 1045, 1055,

1015, 1064, 1066, 1076, 1089, 1013,

1014, 1123

Siera 1172

Signature 1009

Sonitron 1161

Sonolor 1161

Sony 1174, 1001, 1102, 1108

Soundesign 1003, 1038, 1023, 1063, 1113

Starlite 1023

Supersonic 1161

Supre-Macy 1134

Svasa 1161

Sylvania 1003, 1042, 1052, 1053, 1063, 1056,

1057, 1067, 1089, 1151, 1039, 1089

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

352

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group

Registrable input source button :

Symphonic 1044, 1023, 1039

Tandy 1014

Tatung 1069

Technics 1172, 1018

TechniSat 1172

Technosonic 1172

Tecnimagen 1172

Techwood 1003, 1018

Tedelex 1161

Teknika

1003, 1009, 1038, 1045, 1047, 1063,

1023, 1059, 1024, 1026, 1111, 1013,

1113

Telecaption 1074

Telestar 1172

Tesla 1172

Tevion 1172

Toshiba

1176, 1167, 1168, 1042, 1025, 1074,

1026, 1098, 1003, 1107, 1019, 1027,

1111, 1135, 1136

Totevision 1013

TRANS-continents 1172

Triad 1172

Triumph 1172

TVTEXT 1172

United 1172

Universal 1046, 1054

Video Concepts 1113

Viewsonic 1130, 1128, 1006, 1131, 1129, 1109,

1143, 1150, 1022, 1138, 1145

VIZIO 1169, 1170

Wards

1003, 1009, 1044, 1038, 1046, 1052,

1054, 1056, 1110, 1057, 1024, 1015,

1067, 1086, 1103

White Westinghouse

1101, 1001

Wharfedale 1172

Wilson 1172

Windy Sam 1172

Yamaha 1003, 1024

Zenith 1171, 1010, 1003, 1009, 1144, 1153,

1032

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

353

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DVD group

Registrable input source button :

3D LAB 2069

Aiwa 2036, 2037

Alba 2069

Aristona 2069

Apex 2017, 2034, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2012

Bluray 2064

Bose 2038, 2039, 2063

Brandt 2004

California Audio Labs

2066

CyberHome 2068

Dantax 2069

Denon 2047, 2066, 2048

Elta 2068

Finlux 2010

Funai 2049

GE 2020, 2029, 2033, 2009

Go Video 2010

GoldStar 2010

GPX 2010

Grundig 2069

Harman Kardon 2061

Hanseatic 2010

Hitachi 2031, 2012, 2008, 2031

Integra 2062

Insignia 2010

JVC 2069, 2004, 2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,

2042, 2043

Kenwood 2066, 2054, 2053

Koss 2058

LG 2010

Loewe 2069, 2010

Lumatron 2010

Lunatron 2010

Luxman 2008

Magnavox 2069, 2004, 2023, 2025, 2011, 2007

Marantz 2000, 2069, 2025, 2065

Medion 2044, 2010

Micromedia 2069, 2004

Micromega

2069

Mitsubishi 2011, 2015

mp man 2068

NAD 2010

NEC 2010

Omni 2068

Onkyo 2062, 2004

Oritron 2030, 2009

Panasonic 2066, 2004, 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

Philips 2069, 2004, 2007, 2011,2058

Pioneer 2002, 2014, 2056

Polk Audio 2069

Pye 2069

Proscan 2020, 2032, 2009

Radionette 2010

RCA 2020, 2005, 2009, 2035, 2057

REC 2066

Rotel 2040

Salora 2010

Sampo 2041

Universum 2010

Windy Sam 2008

2066, 2069, 2046, 2060

Yamaha

Zenith 2010

Samsung 2066, 2008, 2022, 2024, 2027, 2012

Sanyo 2050, 2052

Schneider 2069

Sharp 2044, 2045

Sherwood 2051, 2010

Skantic 2069

Silva Schneider 2010

Sony 2067, 2001, 2013, 2059

Sylvania 2044

Targa 2010

TCM 2010

Technics 2066

Teac 2010

Tchibo 2010

Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2028, 2008

Typhoon 2068

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

354

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Blu-ray group

Registrable input source button :

Denon 5034, 5042, 5035, 5036

Hitachi 5031, 5032, 5033

Integra 5013

JVC 5037, 5041, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,

5019, 5020

LG 5041, 5010, 5011

Marantz 5000, 5026, 5027

Microsoft 5044

Mitsubishi 5024, 5025

NEC 5041

Onkyo 5013

Panasonic 5041, 5001, 5002, 5003

Philips 5038, 5040, 5004

Pioneer 5005

RCA 5012

Samsung 5039, 5006, 5005

Sharp 5028, 5029, 5030

Sony 5007, 5008, 5009, 5016

Toshiba 5043, 5012

Xbox 5044

Yamaha 5021, 5022, 5023

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

355

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

License

This section describes software license used for this unit.

To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.

oBoost

http://www.boost.org/

Boost Software License – Version 1.0 – August 17th, 2003

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining

a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license

(the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the

Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties

to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:

The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above

license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all

copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,

unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable

object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR

ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR

OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

oExpat

http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html

Ltd

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,

publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit

persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following

conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies

or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

oFastDelegate

http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx

THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS

CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY

OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS

PROHIBITED.

BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU

ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE

AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION

OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT

AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU

CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

356

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Definitions. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which

describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a

user.

“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this

License.

“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other

pre-existing works.

“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any

required data files included in the Work.

“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other

medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.

“Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to

create the Executable Files.

“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been

modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full

discretion of the Author.

“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the

Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and

the Articles.

“You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights

under this License.

Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or

restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the

exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.

License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby

grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the

applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You

may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own

applications.

You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the

Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be

considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.

You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way

to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each

changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.

You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or

Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a

larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.

The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be

distributed or republished without the Author’s consent. The author retains copyright

to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to

this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make

available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.

Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or

Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be

subject to the terms of this License.

Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author

hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,

irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,

import, and otherwise transfer the Work.

Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to

and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original

may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.

You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your

own.

The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.

You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you

from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution

that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

357

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of

this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for,

this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute

and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees

that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code.

You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of

this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not

sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to

the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source

Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a

manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.

You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages

containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable

export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to

the Work after Your receipt of the Work.

Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,

“WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME

ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT

INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-

INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS

CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS

DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE

WORKS.

Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the

Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and

expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to

any use of the Work by You.

Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE

LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU

ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,

PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE

USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE

PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Termination.

This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any

breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received

Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses

terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those

licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this

License.

If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against

any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License

from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.

Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration

of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author

reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop

distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not

serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to

be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full

force and effect unless terminated as stated above.

Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any

circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the

subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in

connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal

theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,

incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The

Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time

without notice

Miscellaneous

This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the

Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of

residence of the Author.

If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it

shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this

License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall

be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and

enforceable.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

358

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach

consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the

party to be charged with such waiver or consent.

This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the

Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations

with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any

additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License

may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You

olibogg

http://www.xiph.org/ogg/

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

olibvorbis

http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

oTremolo

http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo

Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

359

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

oTremor

http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

oMersenne Twister

http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution.

The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products

derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

360

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

ozlib

http://www.zlib.net/

zlib.h -- interface of the “zlib” general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July

18th, 2005

This software is provided “as-is”, without any express or implied warranty. In no event

will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the

following restrictions:

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you

wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment

in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original software.

This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu

ocURL

http://curl.haxx.se

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or

without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this

permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES

OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software

without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

oc-ares

http://c-ares.haxx.se

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation

for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright

notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission

notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used

in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,

written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this

software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

361

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oLicense information for the software used in

the unit

About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser

General Public License) License

This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other

companies.

After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute

the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product.

Marantz provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL

licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service

center.

However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source

code.

Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of

the source code.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

362

Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

3520 10377 20AMA

363

Marantz AV8802A Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Marantz AV8802A

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info